ED3051G542

Technical Manual

RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100MULTIPILOT 1100

Including Installation InstructionsSoftware Version 4.0

Display Electronics UnitsGE3062, RADARPILOT
GE3064, CHARTRADAR andGE3065, MULTIPILOT
Item No.: ED3051G542 Revision: 02 (2005-09) Order No.: 390001631

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, includingthose relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be

t_eu11_eti.fm / 06.09.05

reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party withoutour prior permission in writing.

Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.

SAM Electronics GmbHD - 22763 Hamburg

ServiceCustomer Support Center

Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53Telefax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54e-mail:[email protected]

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100Technical Manual List of Contents

List of Contents

List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.1 Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.2 Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.4 Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.6 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2.1 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.2.3 Operating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.2.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.4 Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.5.1 Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.5.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.5.3 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.6 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.7 VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3 Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.1 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.1.1 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303.1.1.2 Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313.1.2 Electronics Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313.1.3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323.1.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3.2 Specific Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

3

3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100Technical Manual

List of Contents

4.2 "Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4.5 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474.5.1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474.5.2 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514.5.4 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534.5.4.1 Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564.5.4.2 Service Switch of the RDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574.5.4.3 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574.5.4.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584.5.5 IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604.5.7 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.5.8 Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624.5.9 Interconnection Box VS3034G030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.5.9.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644.5.9.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654.5.9.3 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . 664.5.9.3.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664.5.9.3.2 Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674.5.10 Analog Interface GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684.5.10.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724.5.10.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724.5.10.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734.5.11 COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744.5.11.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754.5.11.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764.5.11.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764.5.11.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774.5.11.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774.5.11.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784.5.12 Operating Unit BD3027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794.5.12.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794.5.12.2 Trackball BD 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804.5.12.3 Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804.5.12.4 Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814.5.12.5 Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814.5.13 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865.1.1 Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100) 86

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

4

5.1.2 Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100) . . . 88

5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935.4.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935.4.2 Installation and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93


5.4.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.6 System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985.6.1 Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985.6.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005.6.3 Service Log-in Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

5.8 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025.8.1 Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025.8.2 Map Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025.8.3 Map Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035.8.4 Track Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045.8.5 Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.9 Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055.9.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055.9.2 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055.9.3 Map Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055.9.4 RDC Test Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065.9.5 ARPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095.10.1 Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095.10.2 Determining the Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.11 Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125.11.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125.11.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125.11.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135.11.4 Configuration File Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145.11.5 System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145.11.6 System / Ship Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155.11.7 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205.11.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205.11.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235.11.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265.11.8 Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander) . . . . . . . . . . 1275.11.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285.11.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315.11.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315.11.9 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335.11.10 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345.11.11 Planning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345.11.12 Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355.11.13 ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385.11.14 VDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

5.12 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395.12.1 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405.12.1.1 Monitor Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405.12.1.2 RDC Service and Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

5

5.12.1.3 Check RDC Alarm IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425.12.1.4 Serial I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425.12.1.5 Software Update (+PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435.12.1.6 PCB Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445.12.1.7 RKE Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445.12.1.8 RKE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144


List of Contents

5.12.1.9 Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455.12.2 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455.12.2.1 Setting-to-Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455.12.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485.12.2.3 Magnetron Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495.12.2.4 Antenna Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495.12.3 Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505.12.4 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

5.13 Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535.14.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535.14.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535.14.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535.14.4 Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5.15 Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555.15.1 Analog Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555.15.2 RGB Buffer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

6 Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . 1606.2.1 System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606.2.2 System Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726.2.6 Configure (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736.2.7 Configure (Planning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

6.3 Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746.3.1 COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746.3.2 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756.3.3 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

7 Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

8 Repair/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

8.2 Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818.2.1 Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818.2.2 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818.2.3 Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828.2.4 Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828.2.5 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only) 1838.2.6 The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System . . . . . . . . 1838.2.6.1 Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100): . 1848.2.6.2 Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100): . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

6

8.2.7 Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848.2.8 Trackball Operation is Erratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

8.3 Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868.3.1 System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . 1868.3.2 System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

8.4 Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188


8.4.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888.4.2 Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888.4.3 Console Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888.4.4 SCC C4 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888.4.5 Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898.4.6 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898.4.7 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.5 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918.6.1 Exchange of the Main Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918.6.2 Exchange of the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918.6.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928.6.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928.6.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928.6.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928.6.7 Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938.6.8 Exchange of the IDE Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938.6.9 Exchange of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948.6.10 Exchange of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948.6.11 Exchange of the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958.6.12 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958.6.13 Exchange of Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968.6.14 Exchange of Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968.6.14.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968.6.14.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

8.7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

8.8 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978.8.1 Spare Part Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978.8.2 Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978.8.3 Spare Parts for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

9 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019.2.1 Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019.2.2 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029.2.3 Performance Data of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029.2.4 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029.2.5 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

9.3 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049.3.1 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049.3.1.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049.3.1.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049.3.2 COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

9.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2059.4.1 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

7

9.4.1.1 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.5 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.6 Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

10 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.1 System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207


List of Contents

10.2 AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.3 System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

11 Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

12 Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

13 Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

8

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100Technical Manual List of Figures

List of Figures

Fig. 1-1 Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Fig. 2-1 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Fig. 2-3 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Fig. 2-4 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Fig. 2-5 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation . . . 34Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation . . . . 35Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy . . . . . . . . . 36Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Fig. 4-3 CAN bus concept and termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board) . 45Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander) . . . . . . 45Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Fig. 4-8 Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Fig. 4-10 RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Fig. 4-12 IDE memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Fig. 4-13 Example for a Graphics And Video Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Fig. 4-16 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Fig. 4-17 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Fig. 4-18 Power supply cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Fig. 4-19 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Fig. 4-20 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Fig. 4-21 SH3014T203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Fig. 4-22 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Fig. 4-23 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Fig. 4-24 TTL plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Fig. 4-25 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Fig. 4-26 RS232 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Fig. 4-27 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Fig. 4-28 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Fig. 4-29 Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Fig. 4-31 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Fig. 5-3 Disconnection of the drive cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

9

Fig. 5-4 Dismounting of the drive module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Fig. 5-5 Turning the brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Fig. 5-6 Interfaces for ship’s sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Fig. 5-7 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander . . . . . . . . 94Fig. 5-8 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface . . . . . . . 94Fig. 5-9 System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Fig. 5-10 System Maintenance Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98


List of Figures

Fig. 5-11 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Fig. 5-12 System fault list (present faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Fig. 5-13 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Fig. 5-14 List of software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Fig. 5-15 Configure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Fig. 5-16 TRACKPILOT configuration manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Fig. 5-17 PMA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Fig. 5-18 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Fig. 6-4 System Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . 164Fig. 6-6 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . 165Fig. 6-7 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3 . . . . . . . . . . 166Fig. 6-8 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4 . . . . . . . . . . 167Fig. 6-9 Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . 168Fig. 6-10 Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . 169Fig. 6-11 Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 3 . . . . . . . . . . 170Fig. 6-12 Indicator 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 4 . . . . . . . . . . 171Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Fig. 6-14 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Fig. 6-15 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Fig. 6-16 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Fig. 6-17 RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Fig. 6-18 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Fig. 6-19 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Fig. 6-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Fig. 8-3 Unmounting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Fig. 12-1 Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Fig. 12-2 Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Fig. 12-3 Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Fig. 12-4 Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Fig. 12-5 Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Fig. 12-6 Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Fig. 12-7 Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Fig. 12-8 Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Fig. 12-9 Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Fig. 12-10 Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Fig. 12-11 Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Fig. 12-12 Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Fig. 12-13 Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Fig. 12-14 Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Fig. 12-16 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Fig. 12-17 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4 261Fig. 12-18 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Fig. 12-19 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4 263Fig. 12-20 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

10

Fig. 12-21 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Fig. 12-22 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1 . 266Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Fig. 12-25 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Fig. 12-26 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100Technical Manual List of Figures

Fig. 12-27 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7 . . . . . . . . . . . 271Fig. 12-28 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Fig. 12-29 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7 . . . . . . 273Fig. 12-30 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Fig. 12-31 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Fig. 13-1 Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . 279Fig. 13-3 Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Fig. 13-4 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Fig. 13-5 23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Fig. 13-6 23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Fig. 13-7 23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Fig. 13-8 C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Fig. 13-9 19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Fig. 13-10 19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Fig. 13-11 19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Fig. 13-12 C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Fig. 13-13 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Fig. 13-14 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Fig. 13-15 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Fig. 13-16 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Fig. 13-17 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Fig. 13-18 SCC C4 Console 700 mm, KS3004O100GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Fig. 13-19 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Fig. 13-20 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Fig. 13-21 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Fig. 13-22 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Fig. 13-23 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Fig. 13-24 SCC C4 Console 700 mm stand-alone, KS3005O100GZ 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Fig. 13-25 Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Fig. 13-26 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

11


List of Figures

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

12

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100Technical Manual List of Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations

This list also contains abbreviations which are not used in this manual but in additional documentation.

AA/D Analog/DigitalAFC Automatic Frequency ControlAGP Advanced Graphics PortARPA Automatic Radar Plotting AidATA Automatic Tracking AidAZS Azimuth Start

BBSH Bundesamt für Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency of Germany)

CCAN Controller Area NetworkCD Centred DisplayCRR Close Range ResolutionCRT Cathode Ray TubeCWL Construction Water Line

DDMA Direct Memory Access

EEPA Electronic Plotting AidECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System

FFIFO First In First Out (Memory)FTC Fast Time Constant => Rain (Rain Clutter)

GGPS Global Positioning SystemGVP Graphics and Video Processor

HHF High FrequencyHM Head MarkerHSC High Speed CraftHV High Voltage

IIDE Intelligent Drive ElectronicsIEC International Electrotechnical Commission

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05

13

IF Intermediate FrequencyIMB Interface and Memory BoardISA Industry Standard Architecture Bus

KKBC Keyboard Controller


List of Abbreviations

MMMI Man-Machine Interface

NNACOS Navigation and Command SystemNI NAVIGATION INTERFACENMEA National Marine Electronics AssociationNOB Number of Bitsn.c. Not connected/normally closed (break contact)n.o. Normally opened (make contact)

OONP 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with positive potentialONN 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with negative potential (no ground potential)

PPCB Printed Circuit BoardPCI Processor-Controlled Interswitch, current designation: InterswitchPCI Peripheral Component InterconnectPMB Pentium MotherboardPPI Plan Position IndicatorPRF Pulse Repetition FrequencyPWM Pulse Width Modulation

RRev. Revision (as-delivered status), see Section 1.2RDC Radar Data ConverterRF Radio FrequencyRGB Red Green BlueRKE Remote Keyboard ElectronicsROT Rate of TurnRPM Revolutions per MinuteRSC Radar Scan Converter

SSCSI Small Computer System InterfaceSI Ship’s Interface = Interface ExpanderSRAM Static Random Access MemorySTC Sensitivity Time Control => Sea (Sea Clutter)

TTFT Thin Film TransistorT/R Transmitter/ReceiverTCU Transmitter Control UnitTM True MotionTVA Trigger Video Azimuth (Combined Video)

VVDR Voyage Data Recorder

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05

14


1 General

1.1 Software Releases

1 General

This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:

RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100

- Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box- Operating Units

NOTE:To avoid longwinded phrases, the MULTIPILOT 1100 and the RADARPILOT 1100 are named "radar" inthis manual. The names MULTIPILOT, CHARTRADAR and RADARPILOT are used when it is of interest.

1.1 Software Releases

As soon as important software updates can be delivered, they are mentioned in Section 7.

1.2 Hardware Versions

All pcb’s and units are labelled with a sticker which shows the revision (Rev.) and the print version (forpcbs only). Modifications on a pcb or a unit cause a new revision which is marked by a figure (-, 01, 02,03...). The numbering of the revision is continuous, even when a new print is used for a pcb. If no revisionis marked, the first revision number on the label is valid.

The print version of a pcb is marked by means of characters. The original version is marked with "-"; thefollowing versions are marked with A, B, C, ... . Sometimes it is possible to update pcbs with an olderprint version to a higher revision, and so the print version is not a reliable characteristic for the revisionof a pcb.

Fig. 1-1 Version label

The pcb’s are marked with their print version. The revision status is not recognizable.

ztr1

_139

.jpg Rev., marked by "X" Order No. Item No. of

the complete pcb with all components

Serial No.

tr1_1

79.jp

g

Item No. of the pcb itself, Print version

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

15

Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling

If an item has to be exchanged, the same revision or a newer one must be used.

Refer to Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information.

z without any components


1 General

1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

SAM Electronics gives advice and recommendations for the arrangement of SAM Electronics equipmentand the installation sites. A prerequisite is that the necessary drawings of the ship should be made avail-able in good time.

This advice and these recommendations are given on the basis of our up-to-date practical experienceand to the best of our knowledge. However, they are given without any commitment. As far as is permis-sible, any liability on the part of SAM Electronics for resulting damage is expressly ruled out, regardlessof whether the damage is of a direct or indirect nature.

Unusual shipbuilding shapes, additions or superstructures as well as environmental influences can impairthe functioning of the equipment. We are, of course, willing to help the customer with optimizing solutionssubject to suitable commercial arrangements.

The customer is responsible for ensuring that SAM Electronics equipment is installed properly accordingto our instructions and in compliance with the regulations issued by the relevant classification society andnational authorities.

1.4 Safety Warnings

The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change itsproperties. Before a unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equipment, OrderNo. 586-5011, must be used.

1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.

2. The potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a suitableprotective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MΩ resistor which must not be removed.

3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, thedischarge line is established.

4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools aresupplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,stock No. 593-8099.

Boards and units that contain ESD-endangered semiconductors are marked with the symbol shownabove.

All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESDequipment.

WARNINGThis unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices.Observe precautions for handling.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

16


1 General

1.4 Safety Warnings

DANGERIt is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to thesystem before setting-to-work by a qualified technician.The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of acommon isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’ssupply or the mains cable must be disconnected untilsetting-to-work takes place.

If a synchro or a stepper is connected, dangerous voltagesmight be present, even although all supplies to the radarsystem are switched off.

Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages forseveral hours, even when they have been disconnectedfrom the supply voltage.

The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only themains supply for the motor, and so dangerous voltages arepresent, even when the switch is set to position 0.

WARNINGPay attention to the regulations for the prevention of accidents.

DANGEREven when the system is switched off, there might be adangerous voltage present on exposed contacts. Therefore,before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the elec-trical supply to all units is, and remains, disconnected fromthe ship’s mains.

DANGERIf the Scanner is stationary because the system is switchedoff or because the radar has been switched into stand-bymode, then unless the man aloft switch is set to 0 theScanner might begin to rotate at any time.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

17


1 General

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

DANGERWhen the Scanner is rotating, there is a danger caused byhigh frequency radiation. Do not connect the system to theship’s mains before setting-to-work by a qualified techni-cian.

During normal operation, the transmitter is automaticallyswitched off with a delay of 30 s, before if the speed of theScanner continuously falls short of 50% of its nominalspeed. This function is disabled, if the service mode is acti-vated (switch S1/8 on the RDC or S1/8 on the TCU)!

DANGERNever look down into the open waveguide while the trans-mitter is active. Therefore, before any work in the cablingis done, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to theunit is, and remains, disconnected from the ship’s mains.

There are no international standards concerning the danger caused by high frequency radiation of thekind produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m² isregarded as dangerous. In some countries, values over 10 W/m² are regarded as being not completelysafe.

The distances from the various antennas of the radar at which the radiation density is 100 W/m² and10 W/m², respectively, are stated in the following table.

1.6 Safety Switches

Scanner type TransceiverDistance

Radiation density 100 W/m²

Radiation density 10 W/m²

5 ft X-Band

NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 14 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 21 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 16 m

8 ft X-Band

NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 7 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m

NG3028, 25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 9 m

14 ft S-BandNG3029, 30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m

NG3029, 30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 7.8 m

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05

18

The safety switches are located inside and below the Gearbox/Transceiver. Refer to the technical manualof the Gearbox/Transceiver for further information.


2 Overview

2 Overview

The following drawing shows the structure of the radar system. It consists of 3 main groups of assem-blies:- The Indicator, consisting of the Display Electronics Unit, including the Monitor and the Operating Unit

(various versions available).- The Transceiver, which can be installed in the Gearbox (Version A, "Transmitter Up") or at a

distance from the Gearbox in a housing of its own (Version B, "Transmitter Down").- The Antenna Unit, consisting of the Gearbox and the Scanner.

5 ft X-Band 8 ft X-Band 14 ft S-Band

GearboxX-BandGearboxX-Band

GearboxX-BandGearboxX-Band Gearbox

S-BandGearboxS-Band

X-BandTransceiver,

25 kW

X-BandTransceiver,

25 kW

X-BandTransceiver,

12.5 kW

X-BandTransceiver,

12.5 kW

X-BandTransceiver,

25 kW

X-BandTransceiver,

25 kW

Version A(Transceiver mounted

in the Gearbox,"Transmitter Up")

Version A(Transceiver mounted

in the Gearbox,"Transmitter Up")

Gearbox/ScannerGearbox/Scanner

Transceiver

or

Version B(Transceiver mountedin a bulkhead housing,

"Transmitter Down")

Version B(Transceiver mountedin a bulkhead housing,

"Transmitter Down")

S-BandTransceiver,

30 kW

S-BandTransceiver,

30 kW

S-BandTransceiver,

30 kW

S-BandTransceiver,

30 kW

ARPA EPA

GE 3062/64/65VS 3034G030GE 3062/64/65VS 3034G030

Monitors/Operating Units

Monitors/Operating Units

RadarKeyboardRadarKeyboard

TRACKPILOTTRACKPILOT

as console version, desktopversion or shipyard kit.as console version, desktopversion or shipyard kit.

AIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Logvia optional Analog InterfaceAIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Logvia optional Analog Interface

LogPositionNMEA

Slave Monitor viaoptional Video Buffer/RGB BufferSlave Monitor viaoptional Video Buffer/RGB Buffer

Audio Alarm Off, Alarm (reserve)

23.1"Monitor23.1"

Monitor19”

Monitor19”

Monitor340 mmPPI,TFT

340 mmPPI,TFT

250 mmPPI,TFT

250 mmPPI,TFT

InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

DisplayElectronics Unit




InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

COM-Expander

Interswitch (PCI)CHARTPILOT (via Ethernet LAN)

Gyro

Dead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm,Chart Alarm, System AlarmDead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm,Chart Alarm, System Alarm

Display Electronics Unitand Interconnection BoxDisplay Electronics Unitand Interconnection Box

Indicator Electronics

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

19

Fig. 2-1 System overview

TrackballBD 3028TrackballBD 3028

(optional)BD 3027(optional)BD 3027

Keyboard(optional)BD 3027

Keyboard(optional)BD 3027

ztr1

_007

.eps


2 Overview

2.1 Nomenclature

2.1 Nomenclature

The nomenclature shows the versions of Gearbox, Transceiver and Indicator for the Radar 1100 series.

Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature

RADARPILOT 1102 / ARPA - 2A8XCHARTRADARMULTIPILOT

Options:0 = no options1 = TRACKPILOT

Plotting Aid:AIS/EPA = manual (not for MULTIPILOT)AIS/ARPA = automatic

Antenna Size:5 X = 5 ft X-Band8 X = 8 ft X-Band14S = 14 ft S-BandTransceiver Position:A = Gearbox (up)B = Bulkhead (down)Transceiver Type:1 = 12.5 kW X-Band2 = 25 kW X-Band3 = 30 kW S-Band

Display Size (TFT Monitors):

2 = 250 mm 19.0"9 = 340 mm 23.1"

PPI Size

ztr1

_166

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

20


2 Overview

2.2 Indicator

2.2 Indicator

2.2.1 Versions

The Indicator consists of the Display Electronics Unit GE3062 (RADARPILOT 1100), GE3064 (CHAR-TRADAR 1100) or GE3065 (MULTIPILOT 1100), the Interconnection Box VS3034, the Monitor AZ30XX,the Operating Unit with the Trackball BD3028 and the optional Keyboards BD3027. Depending on theversion, the Display Electronics Unit is mounted together with the Interconnection Box in a consolehousing or it is mounted separately. The Interconnection Box can be mounted below the Display Elec-tronics Unit or separated from it (stand-alone version with cover).

The Display Electronics Unit for the RADARPILOT is available in two different electronic versions:- ARPA (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to

IEC 60872-2)- On customer request, it is possible to configure the radar as True Motion (TM) radar (contains

EPA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-3)

The Display Electronics Unit for the MULTIPILOT always has the ARPA functionality (corresponding toIEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-2)

The following mechanical versions are available:

TFT shipyard installation kit:- Chassis-monitor with mounting kit- Operating Unit (consists of the Trackball or a holder plate equipped with Keyboards / Trackball

corresponding to the order with additional shielding plate)- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a sepa-

rate Interconnection Box.

Desktop version prepared for horizontal surfaces:- Desktop housing with integrated monitor with or without Operating Unit- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a sepa-

rate Interconnection Box.

Console versions:- 19" TFT version completely mounted in a 550 mm console- 19"/23.1" TFT version completely mounted in a 700 mm console

The following monitors are available:

It is possible to connect up to three slave monitors via the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 or further slavemonitors via an additional Video Buffer SH3023. The required technical specifications for these slavemonitors depend on the settings of the Graphics And Video Processor. Ask the SAM Electronicscustomer support for suitable combinations. A slave monitor can get damaged if it is driven with the

Radar (PPI) size 250 mm 340 mm

Resolution 1280x1024 1280x1024 (960)

TFT Monitor type 19" AZ3068G05123.1" AZ3063G050

orAZ3069G040

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

21

wrong parameters.

Depending on the installation location, the Display Electronics Unit can be installed as a package with theInterconnection Box (e.g. in the console housings) or both units separately. In both versions, the housingsof the units stay the same. The Interconnection Box is given an additional cover as a stand-alone unit.


2 Overview

2.2 Indicator

Fig. 2-3 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled

2.2.2 Interfaces

Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors

The Display Electronics Unit provides four serial interfaces (RS422), which are compatible withIEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2. For a dual installation, these interfaces are available for other purposes,such as redundancy or extension, because the data of the sensor inputs of one radar are available forthe other radars of a system, too.

By means of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216, the four interfaces can be adapted also to RS232,RS422, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY). The type of each interface can be defined by means of plug-in interface cards.

The interfaces are available at the Interconnection Box. See Section 4.5.9 on page 64 for further infor-mation.

Additional Sensor Interfaces

It is possible to install an Analog Interface or a COM Expander (it is not possible to install both in thesame Interconnection Box) in the Interconnection Box.

- Analog Interface for log/gyro, AISThe Analog Interface GE3044G207 offers a gyro interface (AC/DC), a pulse log interface and aserial interface for the connection of an AIS. It is mounted inside the Interconnection Box. For further

ztr1

_013

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

22

information, see Section 4.5.10 on page 68.

- COM Expander with serial interfacesThe COM Expander GE3044G210 offers five serial interfaces (inputs/outputs) which can be adaptedto RS232, RS422, RS485, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY) or for the connection e.g. of an AIS,a unit with an NMEA interface or a bridge alarm system. For further information, see Section 4.5.12on page 88.


2 Overview

2.2 Indicator

Interswitch

If the system exceeds the size of a dual installation, an Interswitch (former called PCI) must be integratedto switch the video signal (TVA) of the chosen Transceiver to the Indicator actually being operated.

The Interswitch is mounted in a separate housing (GE3023).

RGB Buffer/Video Switch

As a further option, an RGB Buffer, e.g. for the connection of up to three slave monitors, can be installed.It is mounted in the Interconnection Box. Alternatively, it is possible to connect more slave monitors viathe 5-Channel Video Switch SH3023.

Remote Keyboard Electronics

If slave Operating Units are needed or in case of a distant installation, the so-called RKE is needed. Aseparate technical manual exists for the RKE.

Alarm Outputs

For the connection of an external (central) alarm system, there are potential-free switch contacts (inputsand outputs).

2.2.3 Operating Units

The Operating Unit is divided into three sections. To operate the radar functions, only the Trackball unitis necessary. To improve the handling, an additional Radar Keyboard is available. For the integration intoa NACOS system, the Operating Unit is extended by addition of the Trackpilot Keyboard, which includesthe steering joystick.

ztr1

_017

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

23

Fig. 2-4 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards

For service purposes, the Radar Keyboard and/or the Trackpilot Keyboard can be replaced by a standardPC keyboard with a PS/2 connector. By means of this keyboard, it is possible to enter numeric valuesand to parameterize the system in a more convenient way.


2 Overview

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment

2.2.4 Monitors

The monitors are not covered by this manual. For further information, see the technical manualsfor the monitor.

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment

For the CHARTRADAR 1100, see Section 2.5.

RADAR equipment:

The following combinations with SAM Electronics equipment are possible/not possible:- The RADAR 9xxx transmitter or transmitters of older radar series cannot be used with a 1100 series

Display Electronics Unit.- The RADAR 9xxx Display Electronics Unit or display electronics of older radar series cannot be

used with a 1100 series Display Electronics Unit.- The RADAR 1000 transmitter can be used with the 1100 series Display Electronics Unit if the hard-

ware components are of a specified revision status (see the technical documentation of the antenna(GR3017/GR3018) and Transceiver (NG3028/NG3029)).

NACOS equipment:

- Connection of a TRACKPILOT 1100 or ENGINE INTERFACE- The TRACKPILOT 9401 cannot be connected.

The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT 1100 cannot be integrated in the NACOS xx-2, xx-3and xx-4 systems.

2.4 Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100

A CHARTPILOT 1100 must be integrated in a system with a MULTIPILOT 1100, because the chart main-tenance can be performed only at a CHARTPILOT.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

24

1) Navigation and Command System


2 Overview

2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100

2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100

The hardware of the CHARTRADAR 1100 is the same as the hardware of the RADARPILOT 1100, butit is necessary to enable the CHARTRADAR software functionalities by means of an authorization code.Either the radar can be delivered as a CHARTRADAR 1100 ex works or a RADARPILOT 1100 can beupdated if the prerequisites of Section 2.5.2 are fulfilled.

2.5.1 Functionalities

- Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

- Conning Display

2.5.2 Prerequisites

- The radar must be licensed by means of an authorization code ex works, or the authorization codemust be ordered from the manufacturer. See Section 5 for further information.

- Ethernet network adapter to connect the CHARTRADAR by means of the Ethernet LAN to aCHARTPILOT 1100.

- At least one CHARTPILOT 1100 must be installed in the system.

- Vector chart data installed at the CHARTPILOT

- The conning display should be activated only, if a TRACKPILOT and an ENGINE INTERFACE areconnected, because without these systems there is not enough data available to be displayed.

2.5.3 User Chart Objects

User Chart Objects which have been generated on a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 can be displayed onthe radar without the CHARTRADAR licensing. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT must be configuredas a connected planning system (see Section 5.11.5 on page 114) and the CHARTPILOT must be config-ured as a chartserver (see the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

25


2 Overview

2.6 AIS

2.6 AIS

It is possible to connect an AIS electronics unit to the radar. For further information, see the operatingmanual of the radar and the technical manual of the UAIS Electronics Unit DEBEG 3400. If other AISsystems are used, the minimum demands concerning functionality and interfacing corresponding to theregulations are fulfilled.

Fig. 2-5 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit

The UAIS DEBEG 3400 is connected to the Interconnection Box. The ship’s sensors are connected tothe radars/MULTIPILOTs. The sensor data are transferred from the radar(s) to the AIS (in dual or multipleinstallations, from two radars or MULTIPILOTs as redundancy, if possible).

The repetition interval of the ship’s sensor data is set automatically if the Indicator’s serial interface isconfigured as the AIS Navigation Data interface.

It is also possible to connect the AIS by means of the Ethernet LAN. All CHARTPILOT systems receivethe AIS data via the Ethernet LAN. If the AIS Electronics Unit is not connected to the LAN, only the acti-vated targets can be displayed at the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS Electronics Unit is connected to the LAN,the complete AIS functionality is also available at the CHARTPILOT.

InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

with Analog Interfaceor COM Expander

InterconnectionBox

with Analog Interfaceor COM Expander

VHFAntenna

VHFAntenna

CHARTPILOT 1100CHARTPILOT 1100

RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT 1100




Ethernet LAN

Ship'ssensor data

Ship'ssensor data Ship's

sensor dataShip's

sensor data

Ship'ssensor data

Ship'ssensor data

CAN Bus

RS 422

RS 422

RS

422





UAISElectronics Unit

UAISElectronics Unit

GPSAntenna

GPSAntenna

SAM SAM

Prim. DisplayPort

Prim. DisplayPort

EthernetLAN

EthernetLAN

or

Sensor Input

Channels *)Sensor Input

Channels *)

123

*)

Gyro: HDT, ROTSpeedlog (bottom-track): VBWPosition Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM

All data are transferred with arepetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1)except of DTM (0.1 Hz)

*)

Gyro: HDT, ROTSpeedlog (bottom-track): VBWPosition Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM

All data are transferred with arepetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1)except of DTM (0.1 Hz)

24 VDC

ztr1

_601

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

26

2.7 VDR DEBEG 4300

The VDR DEBEG 4300 can be connected to the Ethernet LAN. For the configuration of the 1100 seriessystem which is necessary for the connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300, see Section 5.5 on page 97.

For the configuration/setting-to-work of the VDR, see the documentation of the VDR.


3 Installation Recommendations

3.1 General Recommendations



3.1.1 Cables

Cable types, cable data, maximum cable length, special instructions for cable laying and connectiondetails are defined in the Cabling Documents of the corresponding equipment (consisting of schematicdiagram, remarks, cable list and connection diagram).

Interface connections should be discussed and agreed with SAM Electronics.

In order to ensure proper functioning of the equipment, the cable types should be selected according tothe cable lists.

In general, the following points must be taken into account:

- For the cables inside the units (cabinets), an extra length of 1 metre is necessary at each end. Ifthe height of the unit exceeds 0.5 metre, an extension by 1 m plus the height of the cabinet is neces-sary.

- The cables must be marked by the electrician at both ends with the cable numbers correspondingto the SAM Electronics cabling documents.

- Where necessary, particular cable glands - marked with letters and/or numbers - are assigned tothe cables.The identification letters and numbers are stated in the connection diagrams; they are either fixed tothe unit or can be seen from the outline drawings (...BZ or ...MB).

- All cables should be kept as short as possible, especially coaxial cables to minimize attenuation ofsignal.

- All connectors installed outdoors (e.g. on coaxial cables) should be waterproof by design to protectagainst water penetration into the cable.

- Coaxial cables should be installed in separate signal cable channels/tubes and at least 10 cm awayfrom power supply cables. Crossing of cables should be done at right angles (90°). Coaxial cablesshould not be exposed to sharp bends, which may lead to change the characteristic impedance ofthe cable. The minimum bend radius should be 5 times the cable’s outside diameter.

- It must be ensured that all cables - including their screens - are passed into the units in contin-uous lengths and are not terminated before reaching the destination equipment. This is not validfor the use of cable glands with grounding inserts.

The cables must be prepared by means of a wire (0.5...1.0 mm², length: 800 mm) as shown in Figure3-1. The wire has to be connected at the shielding terminal contact.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

27




Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings

- When putting the cables into cable glands with grounding inserts, the procedure described mustbe followed (see Figure 3-2).

Coaxial cables must be grounded at the cable gland or cable entry of thehousing and at the suitable terminal.

The internal diameter of the sealing ring (1) must be adjusted to the cable diameter. The screenbraiding (2) must be pushed over the anti-cone (3) of the grounding insert. Then the cone (4)must be put into position. The screen foil (5) must be protected against tearing by means of

ztr1

_153

.jpg

ztr1

_196

.jpg

ztr1

_197

.jpg

ztr1

_198

.jpg

1.

3.

2.

4.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

28




insulating tape (6) before it is unwound. Form a kind of wire from the unwound part of the foiland crimp a connector (7) to the end. The gland must be screwed tight. If the gland is screwedtight with too much strength, it can happen that the screen braiding is cut.

Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts

- With the use of cable glands without grounding inserts, the screen braiding inside the unit mustbe plaited to form a "pigtail", terminated by a cable terminal, and connected to the prescribedgrounding terminal. It must be ensured that the grounding lead is kept as short as possible.

- In the case of a unit whose cable inlet consists of a hole with brackets attached on the insideand outside, the cable must be dressed as shown in Figure 3-3.

- With multicore cables, it is useful to strip down and lace the single wires according to the terminalsequence.

- Receptacle-type cable terminals included in the delivery must be crimped to the connecting leadsby means of a suitable pair of AMP pliers. If a terminal board of a unit has no tabs for the above-mentioned receptacles, other suitable cable terminals must be used.

- Existing cable grippers in the units must be used.

ztr_176.jpg

ztr_180.jpg ztr_178.jpg

12 356 47

as short as possible

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

29

- All cable connections must be carefully checked after completion of the cable work and all cablescreens must be grounded via the shortest possible connections - if not stated otherwise in theCabling Documents/Connection Diagram.

- All cables must be secured by means of suitable clamps (pull-relief) before entering the units.




- When soldering stripped coaxial cables to connectors, it must be ensured that the centralconductor and the screening do not produce a short circuit. A short-circuit check after installation isadvisable.

- It must be ensured that cables do not block any moving parts within a unit.

- Stuffing tubes exposed to the open air must, without fail, be sealed with compound.

- Power leads must be protected by "slow-blow" fuses according to their cross section.

Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets

3.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length

Coaxial Cable for TVA Signal

The maximum length of the TVA cable must not exceed 300 m. For a length of more than 150 m, seethe description of the IF-Amplifier in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.

CAN Bus

The CAN bus cabling of CAN 0 must not exceed a length of 500 m between the termination resistorswhen a cable FMGCH or FMKHC is used.

The CAN bus cabling of CAN 1 must not exceed a length of 100 m.

Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing;contact with the brackets via metal clamp

Installation cablesFMGCH, FMKHC, MGCH etc.

ztr1

_072

.gif

Metal clamp inside

Metal clamp outside

35+5

Brackets

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

30

Ethernet LAN

The Ethernet LAN thin wire cabling must not exceed a length of 185 m.

Video Cable (RGB Buffer)

The video cable (VGA) which is connected to the RGB Buffer must not exceed a length of 50 m.




3.1.1.2 Cable Sets

Cable sets for the standard-cables of X/S-Band installations are no longer available. The cables can beordered in the required length by means of the following order numbers:

3.1.2 Electronics Units

Dimensions, weights, spaces required for service and maintenance and special installation instructionsare stated in the outline drawings and installation drawings of the corresponding unit. In general, thefollowing points also apply:

- The useful life of the components of all electronics units (display units, pulse generators, Trans-ceivers etc.) generally decreases with increasing ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable toinstall such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there are no such facilities - e.g. deckhouse or spacenear or below the water line - these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at asuitable temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside these units.

- With most electronic units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing.

The cooling must not be impaired by partial covering of the unit as a result of insulation (if any) ofthe room (the wall on which the casing is mounted), or by installation of the unit in a confinedcabinet.

Furthermore, the distance from the ceiling and the floor or from a unit situated underneath must beat least 500 mm.

- For service purposes, a power socket (AC 220/230 V) and adequate lighting are necessary in thevicinity of each electronics unit.

- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standardcompass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic protec-tion distance.

This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearestpoint on the corresponding unit concerned.

- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the "wing control console" -protected against the weather - if they do not at least comply with the enclosure type IP 56. In orderto avoid misting of the viewing screen, 25 ... 50 W console-heating (power depending on the volume)is recommended.

- When selecting the site of a unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered according to

Cable type Order No. of the individual items

Coaxial CableDraka 1.0/4.8 AF FRNC(former TELASS 100 PE)

300006082(535-1708)

Cable (8-core)FMKHC 4x2x0.75(former FMGCH)

300005306(535-4461)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

31

the notes in the cabling documents (remarks, cable list).

- The accessibility for maintenance and service (stated in the outline drawings or installation draw-ings) must be considered.

- The impairment of a digital read-out or a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun mustbe avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or venetian blinds.




- Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs mustbe prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).

- When a unit is being installed, the base, floor or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it isflat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such twistingwould impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by means ofspacing-washers.

- The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wireused should have a cross-sectional area of at least 6 mm.

Aboard fibreglass (GRP) vessels, a "grounding network" with a high conductance - taking intoconsideration the working frequencies of the other equipment - must be provided in order to achievesatisfactory EMC (electromagnetic compatibility).

- In the interests of safety during maintaining or servicing, the shipyard should provide a commonisolating switch or circuit breaker (in conjunction with a contactor, if necessary) for all intercon-nected equipment.

- Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be exam-ined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment is toolate, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.

- The equipment should never be switched on by the electricians who did the installation work- not even just for a moment - never!

This is a job for the authorized SAM Electronics service engineer.

- After hand-over of the equipment in good operating condition to the customer, the InstallationReport (Annex of the Warranty Certificate) should be filled in completely and then forwarded to SAMElectronics as proof of such fulfilment. It is important that these requirements be fulfilled in order toavoid the risk of losing the warranty.

3.1.3 Indicator

All radar indicators in the wheel house must be installed in such a way that the radar observer faces inthe forward direction of the ship.

In the case of ferries and special-purpose vessels, the authorities (e.g. the BSH) may permit exceptionsto this rule.

3.1.4 Monitors

General

1. The SAM Electronics radar and navigation equipment monitors have been type-tested and areapproved only in the original as-delivered condition in accordance with IMO Resolution A.694(17);they fulfil the test and approval conditions as per IEC 60945 and DIN EN 60945 ("B - protected fromthe weather").

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

32

2. Changes in the monitors, such as the removal of casings or the closing of existing ventilation open-ings, or improper mounting of the monitors, such as installation in a different casing, will lead to lossof approval; furthermore, our warranty for any resulting damage or malfunctions will become null andvoid.




3. Please note: Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operatingtemperature of 55°C, continuous operation of all electronic components should, if possible, takeplace at ambient temperatures of only 25°C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and lowservice costs.

Installation, Mounting of Monitors

1. Most monitors are intended for various methods of installation or mounting (mounting on thepedestal/panel, desktop or fixed mounting, or bracket mounting to allow tilting for service purposes);for details, please see the relevant installation drawings.

When monitors are mounted side by side or next to a panel wall (for example), the tilting bracket forservice purposes is mandatory.

2. Existing vibration or shock absorbers must not be removed.

3. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the electronic components. The airinlet and outlet openings marked in the installation drawings must definitely be kept clear; coveringswhich restrict ventilation are not permissible.

4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, andmight under certain circumstances lead to excess temperature. This point should already be bornein mind when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows, venti-lation, ...).

5. The space stated in the installation drawings as being necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, forthe operating procedures and for maintenance, must be provided.

6. If the pushbuttons of the monitor are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination (e.g. goose-neck light) is required for navigational use.

7. The installation of additional active electronic components in the units or in the pedestals is notpermissible.

8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings. Attentionmust be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service work.

Ergonomics

1. For observation of the screens both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a monitorinclination of about 30° to 40° (mounting of the monitors on a surface inclined at an angle of about30° to 40°) has turned out to be favourable. This does not apply to monitors in bridge wing panels.

For this purpose, as well as for the operating areas, the rules of the classification society concernedmust in all cases be incorporated into the planning.

2. The brightness of monitors is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or itsreflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means (negativelyinclined window surfaces, venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring of the deck-head, ...).

3. Monitors in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or bulkhead/deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the monitor are notdirected into the observer's viewing direction.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

33

4. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment thatrequire approval (by optical effects, "aids" of that kind can suppress small radar targets, forexample).



3.2 Specific Recommendations


3.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables

The cables between the Display Electronics Unit, the Interconnection Box and the monitor are prefabri-cated. They are marked with numbers which correspond to the numbers of the connectors. See alsoSection 4.5.3.3 on page 51.

3.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy

The RDC offers 4 RS422 interfaces for ship’s sensors which can be converted to RS232, RS485, TTLand TTY by means of plug-in pcbs on the Interconnection Board. It is advisable to use the interfaces asshown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5, which describes the connection of the ship’s sensors to the Intercon-nection Board in a single installation and in a dual installation.

Single Installation

Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation

Gyro

Log

Position Sensor 2

Position Sensor 1

InterconnectionBoardInterconnectionBoard

Interface 1

Interface 2

Interface 3

Interface 4

Display Electronics Unit

ztr1

_118

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

34




Dual Installation

Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation

For further information, see the cabling diagrams in Section 12 and the description of the RDC in Section4.5.4, page 53.



Display Electronics Unit 1

Interface 1

Interface 2

Interface 3

Interface 4

Display Electronics Unit 2

Interface 1

Interface 2

Interface 3

Interface 4

Redundancy

Redundancy

Gyro *)

*)with two electricallyseparated outputs


Output 1

Output 1

Output 2

Output 2Log *)

Other Sensors

Other Sensors

Position Sensor 1

Position Sensor 2

ztr1

_637

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

35




For ship’s sensors with Analog Interfaces, the Analog Interface must be used. The system can alsocontain two Analog Interfaces for redundancy purposes.

Single Installation without Redundancy

Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy

Dual Installation with Redundancy

Position Sensor 1 Connection Board

RDC pcb

AnalogInterfaceAnalogInterface

Display Electronics Unit

Nav Bus

Gyro interface

Log interface

Gyro

Log

AIS

Output

ztr1

_162

.eps

Nav Bus

Interconnection Board

RDC pcb RDC pcb


AnalogInterface 1AnalogInterface 1

AnalogInterface 2AnalogInterface 2

Display Electronics Unit Display Electronics Unit

Gyro interfaceGyro interface Gyro interface

Log interface Log interface

Gyro

Log

AIS*)

AIS*)

*)Connect to Analog Interface 2The AIS must be connected to both Analog Interfacesnot

*)Connect to Analog Interface 2The AIS must be connected to both Analog Interfacesnot

Position Sensor 1*)Output 1Output 2



_638

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

36

Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy

ztr1




3.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400

Connection via RS422 Interface:

In a single installation, an Analog Interface or a COM Expander must be provided to connect the AISsystem. If a second Analog Interface exists (usually in dual or multiple installations for redundancyconnection of an analog gyro), the AIS must be connected to the Analog Interface 2 (usually at Indi-cator No. 2).

The AIS electronics unit must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces!In dual or multiple installations with an analog gyro it is recommended that two Analog Interfaces beused to achieve redundancy of the ship’s sensors (see Section 3.2.2).

Connection via Ethernet LAN:

The AIS can be connected via Ethernet LAN, so that it is not necessary to install an Analog Interface.

3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface

ATTENTIONSetting the compass input to serial IEC 61162-1 data(HDT message with 4800 Baud and 1 Hz repetition rate) willresult in degradation of stabilization smoothness. There-fore such compass installations should only be used for

stabilization purposes of EPA radars.For any installation which is required to meet the IEC 60872-1 (ARPA) orIEC 60872-2 (ATA) specification, the serial data of the gyro compassmust conform to the IEC 61162-2 standard. The interface shall provide aheading data update rate of at least 20 Hz for normal radar and 40 Hz forHSC radar.

ATTENTION (compass systems with synchro transmission)Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degra-dation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Thereforethis setting should not be used where:

- the radar installation has to meet the IMO/IEC Radar PerformanceStandards

- type approval certification is required- the ARPA option is fitted.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

37




3.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems

It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate tothe same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.

- When using a planning system, position coordinates obtained from a chart with a datum deviatingfrom WGS 84 can be converted to WGS 84 map and track data.

- The only position receivers that may be connected to the radar system or NACOS system are thosethat output the position values in the geographical reference system WGS84 via an interface as perIEC 61162-1 1).

- If the radar is installed in conjunction with a navigation system (NACOS/TRACKPILOT), see theappropriate manuals.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

38

1) This part of IEC 61162 is closely aligned with NMEA 0183 Version 2.3 dated March 1, 1998


4 Functional Description

4.1 Block Diagram


4.1 Block Diagram

The radar system can be extended to up to five MULTIPILOT or RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100units. If there are more than two Display Electronics Units or Transceivers in one system, it is necessaryto use an Interswitch in a separate housing to switch the radar videos (TVA signals). The "power on"concept stays the same.

The optional Interswitch and the Analog Interface are permanently connected to the ship’s mains.

Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept

Mains

Operating UnitBD3027




Transceiver(Version A/B) with power supplyand relay


Gearbox

TVACAN 0

Power On

Ship’sDataShip’sData

1-ph / 3-phShip's Mains1-ph / 3-phShip's Mains

1-ph / 3-phShip's Mains1-ph / 3-phShip's Mains

Gyro

AIS

Log

GPSNMEA

Mains

Display ElectronicsGE3062/64/65Display ElectronicsGE3062/64/65

Display ElectronicsGE3062/64/65Display ElectronicsGE3062/64/65

with optionalAnalog Interface orCOM-Expander




TVA 2 outTVA 1 out

CAN 0, Radar Bus

CAN 1, Nav BusCAN 1, Nav Bus

TVA 2 outTVA 1 out

CAN 0, Radar Bus

CAN 1, Nav BusCAN 1, Nav Bus



Gearbox

Ship´sDataShip´sData

Gyro

Log

GPSNMEAMains

Interswitch3 Radars

(optional)≥Interswitch

3 Radars(optional)≥

CAN 0

TVACAN 0

Power On

CH1...5

CH1...CH5

CH1...CH5

in

out

RGBBuffer(optional)

RGBBuffer(optional)

MonitorAZ 30xxMonitorAZ 30xx

Data (PS/2)Data (PS/2)

Power-OnSignal

Power-OnSignal

Power-OnSignal

Power-OnSignal

MonitorAZ 30xxMonitorAZ 30xx

RGB

RGB

RGB RGB

To Slave-MonitorTo Slave-Monitor

Mains

S A MS A M

ztr1

_005

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

39



4.2 "Power On" Concept


Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept

The system is switched on by means of the mains power switch of the master monitor. The mastermonitor is supplied with power by the Interconnection Box. If the mains switch of the monitor is switchedto position "On", the mains supply is led back to the transformer T1 in the Interconnection Box. The trans-former and a rectifier generate the voltage 24V ON/OFF. In contrast to the name, the voltage is about

Transceiver Electronics Unit 1 Transceiver Electronics Unit 2

Monitor Monitor

InterconnectionBoxInterconnectionBox


Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2

PowerswitchPowerswitch

PowerswitchPowerswitch

TB13 TB13

TB3 TB3K1 K1

TB10 TB10

T1

CR1

T1

CR1

TB11 TB11

TB4 TB4

TB5 TB5

Ship's mains Ship's mains

Ship's mains Ship's Mains

from/tootherunits

from/tootherunits


24V ON/OFF(ONP/ONN)24V ON/OFF(ONP/ONN)

24V ON/OFF(ONP/ONN)24V ON/OFF(ONP/ONN)

MainsInput UnitMainsInput Unit

MainsInput UnitMainsInput Unit


24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN) 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)

24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)ztr1

_060

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

40

30...36 VDC without load. In the circuit diagrams, the two wires of 24V ON/OFF are also called ONP andONN. The signal is not connected to a ground potential. It is not permissible to use ONN as a GND lineor to use ONP as a power supply line. 24V ON/OFF is connected as an output to TB3 and switches therelay K1 in the Interconnection Box. K1 switches the mains power supply of the Display Electronics Unitand of an optional slave monitor. If there are more radars or MULTIPILOTs in the system, the 24V ON/OFF signals of these units are connected as an input on TB3, too. The signals are connected by strip




conductors, so that all radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system get the signal if only one radar has beenswitched on. This is necessary to enable the user to obtain the radar video of a second system whoseIndicator has not been switched on. The remote video inputs and outputs are delivered by the DisplayElectronics Unit.

The 24V ON/OFF signal is led to all Transceivers of a system. At Transceivers NG3028/NG3029, it isconnected to TB 3 of the connection board GR3017G200 and switches the mains supply relay for themains input of the mains input unit NG3028G204. In version A, the unit NG3028G204 is situated in theGearbox. In version B it is situated in the bulkhead housing.

The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started as described above. If the BIOS settings areincorrect, the radar might not start.

NOTE:If the Display Electronics Unit is supplied by a UPS, the Transceiver Electronics Unit must not beconnected to TB5. The mains supply for the Transceiver must be connected independently from the UPS.Only if the capacity of the UPS is sufficient for the supply of the Transceiver and the motor (in 1-phsystems), can TB5 be used.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

41



4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination


Fig. 4-3 CAN bus concept and termination

Display Electronics Unit 1Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2Display Electronics Unit 2



Transceiver 1Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2Transceiver 2

RDC RDC

CAN0 & CAN1 CAN0 & CAN1CAN0 & CAN1 CAN1

CAN0 terminationTP161 1/2CAN0 terminationTP161 1/2




J1 J1

J5 (CAN1) J5 (CAN1)J7 J7



Inter-connectionBoard




TB3 TB3

Connection Board

max. length of CAN 0500 m between thetermination resistors

max. length of CAN 0500 m between thetermination resistors

Connection Board

CAN0 CAN0

TB3 TB3J1 J1

TCU TCUJ2 J2

TP531/2

TP531/2

TP531/2

TP531/2

TP781/2

TP781/2

TP781/2

TP781/2

CAN0terminationCAN0termination

CAN0terminationCAN0termination

CAN1term.CAN1term.

CAN1term.CAN1term.

Interface Expander(optional)Interface Expander(optional)

ztr1

_125

.eps

This symbol shows an available connector for the termination of a CAN bus in the drawing above. Do not connect jumpers to all termination connectors. Each CAN bus must be terminated by means of only 2 jumpers. See the following descriptions to choose the correct units for the termination. Never leave out the termination.zt

r1_1

75.e

ps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

42

WARNING

If the termination is not performed, the system might workunreliably!




Figure 4-3 shows the principle of the wiring of the CAN bus system. The example shows a dual installa-tion, version A. The termination resistors must only be implemented at the beginning and at theend of a CAN line. For further examples, see the technotes. The CAN wires should be as short aspossible.

Advice for the Termination of the CAN Buses

1. Determine the beginning and the end of a CAN bus.

2. Terminate the CAN bus only at the beginning and at the end.

3. The CAN bus (CAN 1) is also connected to an optional trackpilot. It is possible that the TRACK-PILOT is connected at the beginning or the end of a CAN bus wiring.

CAN0

CAN0 is also called the "radar bus". By means of the radar bus, the system is controlled; all orders andparameters are sent via the radar bus.

For the example on page 42, CAN0 should be terminated at TP53 1/2 of both Transceivers.

If a direct CAN0 connection between the Transceiver electronics units has been performed, the termina-tion must be performed at the TCU (TP53 1/2) of the last Transceiver in the CAN0 line and at TP161 1/2 of the last RDC of one Display Electronics Unit in the CAN0 line. If an Interswitch (PCI) is used in aseparate housing, it might be necessary to terminate CAN0 at the Interswitch pcb.

CAN1

CAN1 is also called the "navigation bus" or "nav bus". The data of the ship’s sensors, such as positiondata, speed data and gyro data, are sent via the nav bus.

For the example on page 42, CAN1 should be terminated at both RDCs’ TP162 1/2.

WARNINGIf the cable connection between J5 of the InterconnectionBoard and J7 of the Analog Interface or of the COMExpander is not present (e.g. no Analog Interface isinstalled), the CAN bus output terminals of TB3 have nofunction.In this case, the following pins of the InterconnectionBoard must be short-circuited by means of jumpers:J5 1/2J5 3/4J5 5/6J5 7/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

43



4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces


Single Talker/Single Listener

In single talker / single listener systems via the Interconnection Board, it is not necessary to terminate theRS422 interface, because the interface is always terminated at the IMB.

In single talker/single listener systems via the COM Expander, it is necessary to terminate the RS422interface at TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. See page 78 for a description of TP3.

Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection

Single Talker/Multi Listener

Single talker/multi listener connections result from sensors which are connected to two Indicators (redun-dancy). The serial connection must be terminated at the Indicator with the longest distance to the ship’ssensor.

For a RS422 connection via the Interconnection Board, the termination is given by the IMB, so that thetermination at the Indicator with the shorter distance must be deactivated. This must be performed bymeans of an additional plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. The pcb GE3044G218 must be connected tothe Interconnection Board and all jumpers on TP3 must be removed. See page 78 for a description ofTP3.

Ship's sensor

RS422 connected to interconnection board

RS422

RS422

RS422 connected to COM expander

Ship's sensor


COM Expander

IMB

Indicator

Internaltermination

Indicator

GE3044G218

TP3

Jumpers must be set to TP3

ztr1

_649

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

44




Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board)

For a RS422 connection via the COM Expander, the termination resistor must be deactivated at the Indi-cator which is closer to the ship’s sensor (all jumpers must be removed from TP3 of the plug-in adapterpcb GE3044G218). It must be activated at the Indicator which is farther away from the ship’s sensor(jumpers must be set to TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). See page 78 for a description ofTP3.

Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander)

Ship's Sensor RS422

Indicator 1

Indicator 2



IMB

IMB

internaltermination

GE3044G218

TP3

All jumpers from TP3must be removed

internaltermination

ztr1

_650

.eps

Ship's Sensor

Indicator 1

Indicator 2

COM Expander

RS422

Com Expander

GE3044G218

GE3044G218

TP3

TP3


Jumpers must be removedfrom TP3

ztr1

_651

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

45




Separate Serial Interfaces

If the sensor has two separate outputs, then they must be used to install two single talker / single listenerconnections and it is not necessary to modify the termination.

Ship's Sensor

Indicator 1

Indicator 2


COM Expander

RS422

RS422

GE3044G218

TP3


IMB

internaltermination

ztr1

_652

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

46



4.5 Display Electronics Unit


4.5.1 System

ATX motherboard

Power Supply(ATX)Power Supply(ATX)

LAN

CPU Module

Pentium

CPU Module

Pentium

ISA

PCI

Graphics & VideoProcessor(GVP)

Graphics & VideoProcessor(GVP)

RDC

AGP slot

RAMRAM

IDE1

IDE flash module to IDE2IDE flash module to IDE2

RADARPILOT: IDE flash module to IDE1MULTIPILOT: Hard-disk/DVD drive to IDE1RADARPILOT: IDE flash module to IDE1MULTIPILOT: Hard-disk/DVD drive to IDE1IDE2

1 2 Par. PS/2PS/2

COM

Speaker

ResetMonitor control (COM1)

Debug port (COM2)

Parallel port

Trackball (PS/2)Trackball (PS/2)

Keyboard (PS/2)Keyboard (PS/2)

On/Off

Mains

Diskette drive

PositionGyro

NMEACAN0CAN1

LOGSerialI/OSerialI/O

TVA2TVA1

TVA1 out(Remote video)TVA1 out(Remote video)

GB

RtoMonitortoMonitorTarget alarm

Dead man alarm triggerChart alarmAudio alarm ack.

Radar alarm

Reserve

Buzzer

ztr1

_001

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

47

Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit

The block diagram does not show the correct order of the pcb’s. This order depends on the type of moth-erboard which is used in the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 4.5.3 for further information.




The Display Electronics Unit contains the following components:

- Pentium motherboard (PMB)- Radar Data Converter (RDC)- IDE memory module- Graphics and Video Processor (GVP)- Power supply- Interconnection Board- LAN Network Adapter- RGB Buffer (optional)- Hard Disk drive, DVD-ROM drive for MULTIPILOT, diskette drive

The monitors are not dealt with in this manual. Separate technical manuals are available for all typeswhich can be serviced. The monitors can be connected to the Display Electronics Unit or to the RGBBuffer.

The Display Electronics Unit has to process the radar video and to act as the interface to the usertogether with the Operating Unit and the monitor. The functions are described in detail in the followingchapters.

4.5.2 Housing

The components of the Display Electronics Unit are mounted in a metal housing.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

48




4.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB)

CAUTIONThe motherboard shown and described below is only an example(version DFI CA64). The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped witha different motherboard to keep up with technical progress.

Fig. 4-8 Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit

WARNINGDo not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. Thejumpers are set in the factory.

WARNING

ztr1

_015

.jpg

AGP slot Memory banksMain processor with fan

IDE connectors Floppy connector

BIOSPower supply connector

Power On, LED, Lock, Reset, Speaker connectors

Slot 5Slot 4Slot 3Slot 2Slot 1ISA slot(not used)

PCI slots

1 2 3 4 5

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

49

If different motherboards can be used, see Section 7, R e v i -s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information about prerequisites.




4.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards

The main processor is the Pentium processor on the motherboard. The motherboard is a PC board of theATX standard with sockets for CPU, BIOS, RAM, ISA cards and PCI cards.

The interfaces of the motherboard are shown in the block diagram in Figure 4-7. An example of the posi-tion of the connectors is shown in Figure 4-9. The location and the number of connectors depend on theversion of the motherboard. For the sequence of the pcb’s in the PCI slots, see Section 4.5.3.2 on page50.

Types of Motherboards

The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with different motherboards to keep up with technicalprogress. The different versions of the motherboards can be recognized by means of the number of PCI/ISA slots and some labels of the manufacturer. Some types of motherboards have an onboard soundcard. In this case, the sound option must be disabled in the BIOS settings (see Section 5.14) and, in caseof exchange, the covers must be removed from the openings for the sound card connectors in the elec-tronics unit’s housing. At present, the following type of motherboard is used:

Connection of the Buzzer

The speaker output of the motherboard is connected to E20/1 of the RDC. The position of the connectoron the motherboard depends on the version of the motherboard. Usually, the motherboard pcb isinscribed accordingly. See Figure 4-8 for an example. Only one contact of the connector is used. If thecable is connected to the wrong connector, the buzzer does not work.

4.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot

The pcb’s which are described in the following sections have to be plugged in at a defined PCI slot. It isnot permissible to change the position of the pcb’s on the motherboard. If a pcb has been plugged in atthe wrong PCI slot, then unforeseen faults will probably occur.

CAUTIONFor the slot numbers, see Figure 4-8 on page 49. Thenumbers printed on the motherboard pcb may be differentand are not valid. Start to count from the ISA slots onwardsin direction of the processor, as shown in Figure 4-8. Thenumber of ISA and PCI slots depends on the motherboardtype. The position of the pcbs must NOT be changed!

Type of motherboard Number of ISA slots

Number of PCI slots Position of the manufacturer’s label

DFI CA64 1 5 - On the housing of the parallel interface

PCI Slot No. 1)

PCB DFI CA64

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

50

1) The slot numbers printed on the pcb are not valid! See Figure 4-8 on page49 for the correct sequence.

Ethernet module 2

GE3044G219 (RDC) 5




4.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit

Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit

No. of Contact Function

1 Mains connector

2 Voltage selector (115/230 V). If this switch is not provided, the power supply unit adapts automati-cally to the mains supply voltage.

3 Mains switch (Important: The system must be switched on / off by means of the monitor mains switch! This switch should be used for service purposes only.)

4 Supply connector for the Operating Unit (= 5)

5Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit or Interconnection Board GE3044G216 if plug-in pcbs are used (= 4). This connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted additionally (GE3044G052, order No. 2776376) if necessary.

6 Trackball connector

7 Keyboard connector

8 USB connector, not used

9 Parallel port, not used

10 Serial port, for monitor OSD data (depending on monitor type), to J3 of the Interconnection Box

11 Serial port, not used

12 1) VGA connector for Monitor or to RGB Buffer in the Interconnection Box or the 5-Channel Video Switch

13 1) VGA connector for RDC input (TVA1, TVA2, TVA1 out), to J4 of the Interconnection Box

ztr1

_078

.jpg

1 2 3

4 5

6 7 8 10 11

9

13 14 1512

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

51

1) The positions of the connectors depend on the motherboard type. See Section 4.5.3.2.

14 1) RDC connector, to J1 of the Interconnection Box

15 1) Ethernet module (optional)




The connectors for the supply of power to the keyboard and the plug-in adapterpcbs are similar. The 12 V supply is not needed.

If plug-in pcbs for the interface conversion are mounted, the InterconnectionBoard needs a separate power supply cable, which must be connected at one ofthese connectors. The second connector is currently not delivered ex works. Itmust be mounted additionally (kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if neces-sary.

ztr1

_101

.jpg

12 V 5 V

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

52




4.5.4 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

ztr1

_623

.jpg

1

1 1 1 1 1 18

DS4 DS8S1

1

E15 E20 E2 TP151TP152TP161

TP162

1 1

1 1

E10/E11

E1 E4 1

1E14

1E16

1

E17

1

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

J4

E28

Termination ofTP103 serial interface 4TP102 serial interface 3

E12

E5 E3, ext. Reset contact

J2

DS5 DS7DS6 DS8

DS9DS10

DS1DS2

DS3 DS11DS12

DS13

E25

E26

E27

1) See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.

DIP Switch S1/5...8

Function

ON OFF

5Boot from IDE memory module (default)

Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is started while booting).

6 Monitor resolution 1024x768

Monitor resolution 1280x1024

7 Monitor frequency 72 Hz Monitor frequency 60 Hz

8 Normal operation (default) Service Mode On 1)

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi-cator NumberOn=closed=0; off=open=1

Switch No.

4 3 2 1

Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On

Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off

Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On

Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off

Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On

All other settings are not admissible

Settings for the Different Monitor Types

Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7

AZ3069G040 Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off

AZ3063G04x/5x Off Off AZ3056G04x Off Off

AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off

AZ3065G040 Off Off

CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2

TP162 1/2

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus termi-natedNo jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not terminatedSee also Section 4.3 on page 42.

E19

E18

Motherboard

1.jp

g

Speaker

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

53

Fig. 4-10 RDC pcb

TP101 serial interface 2TP100 serial interface 1

E5/2

ztr1

_01

E5/1

E20/1




Watchdog

If an error is detected in the electronics units‘ components, a red screen is generated and by means ofthe reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the motherboard is reset. In case of such a reset,the system reboots. If the reset cable is not connected, the red screen is displayed permanently to indi-cate the error, because the reset cannot be performed.

Connectors/Jumpers/Test Pins

E1, E4, E10, E11, E12, E14, E16, E25, E26, E27, E28 are for the manufacturer‘s use only. It is notpermissible to connect cables or jumpers to one of these contacts. Jumpers which have been set in thefactory must not be removed!

E2 Function

1 Not used(1: speaker signal, 2,3: not connected, 4: GNDOutput for an internal speaker)2

3

4

E3 Function

1 Not used (a zero-potential touch contact can be connected as a reset button)

2

E5 Function

1 Watchdog functionality of the RDC. Reset output, zero potential. Must be connected to the reset input of the Display Electronics Unit‘s motherboard.For motherboard DFI CA64: E5/1 to the left pin of the reset input, E5/2 to the right pin.2

E15 Function

1 AGND (analog GND)

3 TVA signal test point (TVA1, TVA2 or TVA test signal). Trigger=+2 V, Video=-2 V, AZIMUTH-START=-4 V, AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, see Figure 4-11 on page 57.

E17 Function

1 Trigger signal (TTL high pulse)

2 Synchronization start signal (TTL low pulse)

3 Synchronization data (TTL)

E18 Function

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

54

1 GND

E19 Function

1 AGND (analog GND)




LEDs

E20 Function

1...4 Speaker input, must be connected to the speaker output of the motherboard. Only pin 1 is used.

TP100...103 Function

1 Termination of the serial interfaces.Jumper on 1/2 = termination with 120 Ω (default)No jumper on 1/2 = no terminationTP100 = serial interface 1, TP101 = serial interface 2,TP102 = serial interface 3, TP103 = serial interface 4

2

TP151 Function

1 Jumper on 2/3 = alarm acknowledge input (Interconnection Board TB2 13/14) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)2

3

4

TP152 Function

1 Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB2 15/16) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)This input can be used to turn the headmarker by 180° by means of an external contact. This function must be configured in the System Maintenance Manager (Configure). If the external contact is closed, the headmarker is turned. This function must not be used in NACOS systems.

2

3

4

Function

While system booting During operation

DS1 green ON ON = DSP2 selftest failed

DS1 red OFF ON = DSP1 selftest failed

DS2 green ON Toggle = DSP2 host communication failure

DS2 red OFF Toggle = DSP1 PCI overrun

DS3 green ON Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP2)

DS3 red OFF Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP1)

Function

ON OFF

DS4 green UART 1 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

55

DS4 redUART 0 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

DS5 greenUART 3 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

DS5 redUART 2 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished




4.5.4.1 Alarm Contacts

The alarm outputs are:1. Radar alarm2. Dead man alarm trigger3. Target Alarm (formerly ARPA Alarm)4. Chart alarm

The alarm inputs are:1. Audio Alarm Acknowledge2. Not used

The outputs are relay contacts. The maximum load of the contacts is 24 V/0.3 A. The inputs can beswitched by means of TP151 and TP152 to zero potential inputs (switch, relays) or suitable for 20 mAcurrent loop (optocoupler driver input).For further information on the alarms, see the operating instructions.

DS6 greenCAN1 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

DS6 redCAN0 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

DS7 green Toggle on every interrupt entry

DS7 red Not used

Function

DS8 green On = PCI DMA running

DS8 red On = PCI DMA inactive

DS9 green On = DSPs are not held

DS9 red On = DSPs are held

DS10 green On = ARPA DMA running

DS10 red On = ARPA DMA inactive

Function

DS11 green No function

DS11 red Syndat signal failure (TVA signal)

DS12 green Manufacturer‘s use

DS12 red Trigger signal failure (TVA signal)

DS13 green Manufacturer‘s use

DS13 red Synstart signal failure (TVA signal)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

56




4.5.4.2 Service Switch of the RDC

The service switch of the RDC (S1/8) also activates the service functions of the TCU, so that it is notnecessary to set the service switch S1/8 of the TCU additionally (see the technical manual of the Gear-boxes/Transceivers). If the service switch of the TCU is activated, the service mode functions of the RDCare not available, so that it is advisable to activate the service mode by means of the service switch ofthe RDC.If the service mode is activated by means of the DIP switch S1/8, the following functions are available:

- Acquire targets without gyro data (to test ARPA functions).- Acquire targets without Radar Bus data.- Display the radar video although the Radar Bus is not working correctly.- Activation of a check mode during the start. The sequential start of the processes is displayed. When

an error crops up, the booting routine is stopped immediately and the faulty process can be recog-nized.

- Access to Service Menus without password.- Activation of the TCU service mode with the following functions:

- If the Scanner stops turning, the Transceiver is not switched off.- If the magnetron current exceeds or falls short of its limits, the Transceiver is not switched off.- If a communication time-out occurs in the communication with the master Indicator, the Trans-

ceiver is not switched off.

The maintenance menus can be entered and used without the use of the service switch. The switch offersthe additional functionalities described above, especially for the setting-to-work phase.

NOTES:- As soon as setting-to-work, maintenance or service work has been finished, the service mode must

be switched off!

- The service mode must not be active during normal operation!

- If the service switch is activated during normal operation, a frozen radar video might be displayed atthe Indicator if the Transceiver is switched off!

- If the service mode is activated, the Transceiver is not switched off automatically when the Scannerstops turning!

4.5.4.3 Adjustments

U

t

+2 V/75 Ohm

Trigger Trigger

Video

100 µs

2 ms / 1 ms / 0.5 ms

~15 µs

5 µs 5 µs

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

57

Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal

-2 V/75 Ohm

-4 V/75 OhmAzimuthstartAzimuthstart

LSB MSBAzimuth data

ztr1

_024

.cep

s




Figure 4-11 shows an idealized diagram of the TVA signal. In the Radar 1100 series, the adjustmentscan be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software. The values are measuredand set automatically. For further information, see Section 5.12.1 on page 140.

4.5.4.4 Functional Description

Interfaces

The RDC contains inputs for the connected sensors and outputs for alarms.4 serial interfaces RS422 for the standard sensors, 2 CAN bus interfaces (Radar Bus and Nav Bus), 4alarm outputs (incl. 1 dead man alarm) and 2 alarm inputs are available.

It is advisable to use the serial interfaces as shown in Section 3.2.2, page 34 and in the cabling docu-ments.

Radar Video Processing

The RDC unit transfers the processed radar video via the PCI bus with a frame rate of at least 15 Hz tothe Graphics And Video Processor (GVP).The DSP software includes the functions Range Scale, North-Up Stabilization and True Motion Stabilisa-tion.The video processing includes gain adjustment, Rain (FTC), Auto Rain, Interference Rejection, DirectVideo, Video STC, Video Enhancement (if Clean Sweep is switched on) and turn-by-turn correlation.

ARPA Functions

The RDC is not responsible for the complete ARPA functionality. The ARPA processing (acquisition,tracking, zone control, display of tracked targets) is done by the main processor on the motherboard(PMB).

The RDC prepares the combined video signal and transfers it via the PCI bus to the main processor.

Memory

The RDC has a battery buffered memory which saves the radar status and configuration data, forexample the boot mode of the MULTIPILOT or the current operator settings during the power down ofthe system, so that it can be started again with the same settings. The operating system, the applicationsoftware, the configuration data and data such as the map and track data are stored in the IDE memorymodule and/or the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

58




4.5.5 IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001)

Fig. 4-12 IDE memory module

In the RADARPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE1 connector of themotherboard. In the MULTIPILOTPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE2connector of the motherboard (the hard-disk/DVD drive is connected to the IDE1 connector).

It contains the operating system and the application software of the radar. The operating system and theapplication software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In case of a hard-disk failure, theMULTIPILOT can be booted from the IDE memory module and operates as a standard radar. SeeSection 8.2.6 on page 183 for detailed information.

The configuration parameters are always saved in the IDE memory module.

Different versions of the IDE memory module will be used in accordance with the technical progress. Themodules have a switch or a jumper for the master/slave mode selection. They must always be configuredas master.

The power supply for the module is the same as for a hard-disk drive.

ztr1

_625

.jpg

Master/slave switch

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

59




4.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213

Fig. 4-13 Example for a Graphics And Video Processor

The Graphics And Video Processor is a standard video adapter card with the following specifications:

- AGP bus interface- 8 MB video RAM- Video output with VGA connector, synchronization coupled to green signal or separate signals- QNX-qualified

Depending on technical progress it is possible, that different versions of the Graphics And Video Proc-essor are used.

The main processor’s software controls the overlay of the MMI graphics, the line graphics of the PPI area,the ARPA/plot graphics and the radar video (generated by the RDC unit), by the use of "intelligent“ copycommands to the graphics processor of the GVP unit.

The function Centred Display and the calculation of the afterglow lines of the trails and targets areperformed by software through the main processor and the GVP.

ztr1

_014

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

60

No settings or adjustments have to be performed at the pcb.




4.5.7 Power Supply

The power supply for the Display Electronics Unit isa standard PC power supply corresponding to theATX specification. It supplies the following volt-ages:

- +3.3 V- +5 V- +12 V- -12 V- -5 V- +5 V stand-by

NOTEThe power supply is equipped with a protective against totteringcontacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, thepower supply does not start and it must be switched off for 5...10 s untilit can be switched on again.

Power Supply

ztr1

_022

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

61




4.5.8 Ethernet Module

The Ethernet network adapter is needed for the inte-gration of the radar into a NACOS system. It is notneeded for a single, dual or multiple radar installa-tion but it can be used to connect a DEBEG AIS orVDR system.

The Ethernet module is plugged into the mother-board slot. The wiring must be done following Figure4-14 with 50 Ω coaxial cable (for example inside theenclosures, RG 58, for ship’s cabling RG 213 / U,see cabling diagrams). The network is a 10 Mbitnetwork with Thin Ethernet wiring.

Y-plugs are delivered instead of the T-plugsformerly used. The BNC Y-plugs must be connecteddirectly into the Ethernet module. It is not admissibleto connect the Y-plug and the network adapter bymeans of a coaxial cable.

The proper termination with a 50 Ω BNC-terminationplug at both ends of the Ethernet line is very impor-tant.

It is not permissible to use cable with a character-istic impedance different from 50 Ω.

No settings or adjustments have to be made on theEthernet module.

NOTE:If the Ethernet module is not used, it must be removed from the electronics unit. It must bereplaced by a slot cover with the order No. 5582688.

Fig. 4-14 Principle of wiring for LAN Network

T

T

ztr1

_071

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

62




Figure 4-15 shows the variouspossibilities for connecting the LANEthernet. It is not admissible toconnect RG213/U coaxial cabledirectly to the Ethernet module.The cabling has to be converted intoRG58C/U by means of the adapterbracket in the interconnection unitand the RG58C/U coaxial cablewhich must be used between theadapter bracket and the Y-plug onthe LAN network adapter pcb. Directwiring with RG58C/U cable ispossible if the cables are routedinside the console housings.

Fig. 4-15 LAN Ethernet wiring of a quadruple system

T

TRACKPILOT Electronics Units orRADAR/MULTIPILOT/CHARTPILOT Electronics UnitsTRACKPILOT Electronics Units orRADAR/MULTIPILOT/CHARTPILOT Electronics Units Interconnection Units

RG58

RG58

RG58

RG58

RG213

RG213

RG213

RG213

T

ztr1

_161

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

63




4.5.9 Interconnection Box VS3034G030

The Interconnection Box provides the terminalsfor the connection of the ship’s cables and for theinternal wiring to components of the Display Elec-tronics Unit.

The Interconnection Box contains also compo-nents for power supply and the system’s powerswitch. The pcb GE3044G216 offers four inter-faces which can be adapted to 20 mA current loop(TTY), TTL, RS422 or RS232 by means of plug-inpcbs.

If the Interconnection Box is mounted below theDisplay Electronics Unit. The optional RGB Bufferand Analog Interface can be mounted in the Inter-connection Box. Suitable bolts are provided.

The main signals which are connected via the Interconnection Box are:

- TVA video (TVA1 in and TVA2 in)- TVA1 out (remote video)- Serial interfaces (ship’s sensors, AIS)- 2 CAN buses- Alarm signals (input and acknowledge)- Mains supply- Power on/off switch signals

4.5.9.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box

Interconnection Box with RGB Buffer and Analog Interface

zt1r

_016

.jpg

r_08

1.jp

g

J2RGB IN

J3RGB OUT

J4RGB OUT

RGB Buffer connectors, see Section 4.5.13J5

RGB OUT

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

64

Fig. 4-16 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box

zt1

J3, monitor OSD data to display el. unit

J2, monitor OSD data to monitor

J4, TVA to RDC J1, sensor signals to RDC




4.5.9.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G216

ztr1

_613

.jpg

TB1 Function Ship’s sensors RS42220 GND419 TXD4-18 TXD4+17 RXD4-16 RXD4+15 GND314 TXD3-13 TXD3+12 RXD3-11 RXD3+10 GND29 TXD2-8 TXD2+7 RXD2-6 RXD2+5 GND14 TXD1-3 TXD1+2 RXD1-1 RXD1+for TTL, 20 mA, RS232,see Section 4.5.9.3 on page 66.

TB2 Function19 = TB3/518 = TB3/517 = TB3/5Double End Ferry:15, 16 closed = AFT15, 16 opened = FWDAudio Alarm Ack.:14 Alarm Ack. M13 Alarm Ack. PChart Alarm:12 AL_out4 make11 AL_out4 centre10 AL_out4 breakTarget Alarm:(ARPA/AIS Alarm)9 AL_out3 make8 AL_out3 centre7 AL_out3 breakDead Man Alarm Trig:6 AL_out2 make5 AL_out2 centre4 AL_out2 breakRadar Alarm:3 AL_out1 make2 AL_out1 centre1 AL_out1 break

TB3 Function 15 24V ON/OFF ONN14 24V ON/OFF ONP13 24V ON/OFF ONN12 24V ON/OFF ONP11 CAN0_A (IN)10 CAN0_B (IN)9 CAN1_A (IN)8 CAN1_B (IN)7 CAN0_A (OUT)6 CAN0_B (OUT)5 CAN_GND4 CAN1_A (OUT)3 CAN1_B (OUT)2 24V ON/OFF ONN1 24V ON/OFF ONPIN and OUT for the CAN-Bus are identical.

TB6 Function 1 L1 to interf. expander2 N to interf. expander3 PE to interf. expander

TB5 Function 1 L1 spare2 N spare3 PE spare

TB4 FunctionShip’s mains1 L1 in2 N in3 PE in

J7 FunctionMains to Analog Interface1 L12 N3 PE

TB10 Function1 L1 out, to monitor2 N out, to monitor3 PE out, to monitor

TB11 Function1 L1 out, displ. el.2 N out, displ. el.3 PE out, displ. el.

TB13 Function1 L1 in, switched

by monitor2 N in, monitor3 PE in, monitor

TB17 Function 1/2 TVA1 out

3/4 Screen

TB16 Function 1/2 TVA2 in

3/4 Screen


3/4 Screen

J4 Function to El. Unit (RDC)1 TVA12 TVA23456 GND7 GND8 GND91011121314

J3 Function to El. Unit serial port1 n.c.2 COM1_RXD3 COM1_TXD4 COM1_DTR5 COM1_GND6 COM1_DSR7 COM1_RTS8 COM1_CTS9 n.c.

J2 FunctionSerial interface to monitor1 LKAP (Beeper +)2 RXD

J1 Functionto El. Unit (RDC)1 RXD1+2 RXD1-3 TXD1+4 TXD1-5 GND16 RXD2+7 RXD2-8 TXD2+9 TXD2-10 GND211 RXD3+12 RXD3-13 TXD3+14 TXD3-

22 AL_out2 centre23 AL_out2 make24 AL_out3 break25 AL_out3 centre26 AL_out3 make27 AL_out4 break28 AL_out4 centre29 AL_out4 make30 +5 V31 TXD4+32 TXD4-33 GND434 GND35 LKAP (Beeper +)36 LKAM (Beeper -)

44 VGND145 V12M46 n.c.47 Audio Alarm

Ack. P48 Audio Alarm

Ack. N49 Alarm-ACK2 P

3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2

111

1

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

S1

J5

115 V230 V

F1

F2

F3

F5F4

K1

TB1 TB2 TB3

TP10

J4 J3 J2 J1

J6

Drillings for the RGB Buffer

FusesF1 System’s Mains

FuseF2 System’s

Mains fuseF3 Mains fuse monitorF4 Mains T1F5 24V ON/OFF signalSee also page 190.

J5 CAUTIONIf the Analog Interface is not connected, the following jumpers must be set to enable TB3 for the CAN bus:- J5 1/2- J5 3/4- J5 5/6- J5 7/8

T1

TB 2, Alarm ContactsThe alarm contacts are provided by the RDC. See the RDC description for technical data and configuration.

Drillings for the LAN-BNC adapter

LED FunctionDS1 is lit when mains is switched on at the monitor of this radar.DS2 is lit when the DC voltage is available from the transformer/rectifier.

1

Plug-in pcb 1

Plug-inpcb 4

DS1

DS2

TB18, J100, J8, TP10These connectors and testpins are needed for the connection of a Remote Keyboard Electronics. See the corre-sponding technical manual of the RKE for further information.

J8

TP11J9

J100 11

1

Drillings for the Video Selector SH3023G222

Position of the RKE pcb,mounting by means of 4 bolts.

TB18 Function For Remote Keyboard Electronics6 CAN_KBC GND5 CAN_KBC GND4 CAN_KBC B Out ->3 CAN_KBC A Out ->2 CAN_KBC B in <-1 CAN_KBC A in <-

J91

1SB

SB = Solder BridgesThese 5 solder bridges must be opened, when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used. For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary. If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the power supply cable GE3050G020 must be used (J9). See also TP11.

SB SBSB

TP11Jumper on 1/2 = defaultJumper on 2/3 = must be set if the power supply cable GE3050G020 is connected (plug-in pcbs)

Plug-inpcb 3

Plug-inpcb 2

break = normally closed (n.c.)make = normally opened (n.o.)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

65

Fig. 4-17 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216

15 GND 3 TXD4 DTR5 GND6 DSR7 RTS8 CTS9 LKAM (Beeper -)

15 GND316 RXD4+17 RXD4-18 AL_out1 break19 AL_out1 centre20 AL_out1 make21 AL_out2 break

37 CAN0_A38 CAN0_B39 CAN1_A40 CAN1_B41 CAN_GND42 VGND243 V12R

J6Connector for theRGB Buffer, See Section 4.5.13.

J9, J91 FunctionSupply input for plug-in pcbs1 Vcc2 GND3 Vcc4 PE




4.5.9.3 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216

The ship’s sensors are connected to the terminals TB1 of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216. Theplug-in pcbs can be used together with the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 to convert the four serialinterfaces to TTL, 20 mA current loop (TTY) and RS232 for the connection of ship’s sensors with inter-faces different from RS422. It is not necessary to use the RS422 plug-in pcb. See page 44 for furtherinformation about the termination of the RS422 interface.

The plug-in pcbs must be fixed by means of a bolt and a nut.

4.5.9.3.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1

NOTE:1. If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, the additional connector must be mounted by means of

the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198). See page 67 for further information.

Plug-in pcb

No.

RS422 TTL TTY (20 mA current loop) RS232

TB1 No plug-in pcb or GE3044G218 GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214

4

20 GND4 GND GND GND

19 TxD4 - GND TxD4 - GND

18 TxD4 + TxD4 TxD4 + TxD4

17 RxD4 - GND RxD4 - GND

16 RxD4 + RxD4 RxD4 + RxD4

3

15 GND3 GND GND GND





2

10 GND2 GND GND GND





1

5 GND1 GND GND GND





ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

66

2. If a plug-in adapter pcb is used, the five solder bridges on the InterconnectionBoard below the plug-in adapter pcb must be opened by means of a sharpknife.




3. Usually, it is not necessary to use a plug-in adapter pcb for a ship’s sensor with RS422 interface. Ifthe impedance of the interface is too low, the plug-in pcb can be used to have the termination resis-tors of the plug-in pcb available, which can be activated by means of TP3.

The pcbs are the same which must be used for the COM Expander. See the following sections for adescription:

Section 4.5.11.2.1, T T L P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 1 on page 76.

Section 4.5.11.2.2, 2 0 m A C u r r e n t L o o p ( T T Y ) P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 2 on page 77.

Section 4.5.11.2.3, R S 2 3 2 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 4 on page 77.

Section 4.5.11.2.4, R S 4 2 2 / R S 4 8 5 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 8 on page 78.

4.5.9.3.2 Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035)

If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, an additional power supply cable is necessary. Currently theElectronics Unit is delivered with only one power supply connector at the rear (see Section 4.5.3.3 onpage 51). In this case, the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198) must be use. It isincluded in the standard scope of delivery for new systems, if required.

The connector with cable (GE3044G052) must be mounted in the Display Electronics Unit. The cablemust be connected to an unused plug of the Power Supply Unit. If no suitable plug is available, theadapter (976296-33) must be used. The cable GE3050G020 must be connected between the newinstalled connector at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit and J9 of the Interconnection Board.Furthermore, the jumper TP11 must be set to 2/3.

If a Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 is installed in the Interconnection Box (in case of a RemoteKeyboard Electronics), it is not necessary to install the Modification Kit. See the Technical Manual of theRemote Keyboard Electronics for further information..

ztr1

_640

.jpg

ztr1

_641

.jpg

TP11

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

67

Fig. 4-18 Power supply cable GE3050G020




4.5.10 Analog Interface GE3044G207

For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.

Fig. 4-19 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03

ztr1

_080

.jpg

TB25TB24TB23TB22TB21TB20

TB1TB2TB3TB4TB5TB6TB7TB8

TB52, PETB51, NTB50, L1

TP5 TP1 TP74 TP90 TP70TP75

1

1 1

1 1

11

1

F1

TP2J7DS7DS37

DS35DS33

DS34DS36

TB Function 25 Common (stepper)24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common

(synchro)23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro)22 Gyro T21 Gyro S20 Gyro R


TB30TB31TB32TB33

TB Function 40 Alarm out 1, make41 Alarm out 1, centre42 Alarm out 1, break43 Alarm out 2, make44 Alarm out 2, centre45 Alarm out 2, break

TB Function 30 ST1 status input for gyro31 ST1 status input for gyro32 ST2 status input for log33 ST2 status input for log

TB Function 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts)2 Log BT (bottom track)3 Log WT (water track)4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))6 Log VX (speed)7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift))8 Log GND

1

TP78 Termination Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.

TP99 AddressesSet jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (for a second Analog Interface)

1 7

TB44

TB10TB11TB12TB13TB14TB15TB16

TB Function 10 AIS RxD - (Input -)11 AIS RxD + (Input +)12 do not connect!13 do not connect!14 AIS TxD - (Output -)15 AIS TxD + (Output +)16 AIS GND(≥Rev 03 only)

J1 RS422 InterfaceConnector for SH3014G203, RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

68




Connectors / Jumpers / Test Pins

TP1 Function

1 1 = VCC, 2 = LM, 3 = SPA_LOGSet jumper on 1/2 to supply log outputs (zero potential) with voltage.Set jumper on 2/3 to supply log outputs with external voltage.2

3

TP2 Function

1 VCC, jumper must be set (default ex works).

2

TP5 Function

1 Jumper on 2/3 = ST1 (status input 1) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mAJumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = ST1 signal as zero potential contact

2

3

4

5 Jumper on 6/7 = ST2 (status input 2) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mAJumper on 5/6 and 7/8 = ST2 signal as zero potential contact

6

7

8

TP70 Function

1 n.c.

2 n.c.

3 n.c.

4 GND for serial interface, for manufacturer’s use

5 TXD, manufacturer’s use

6 RXD, manufacturer’s use

7 Activate bootstrap loader, active low, for manufacturer’s use

8 GND for bootstrap loader, manufacturer’s use

TP90 Function

1 RESET IN

2 GND

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

69




LEDs

Fuse

J7 Function

1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board

2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board

3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board

4 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board

5 5/6 connected

6

7 7/8 connected

8

Function

DS7 green C167 controller initialization finished

DS7 redFlashing at 0.25 Hz = normal operation (only second Analog Interface)Flashing at 1 Hz = normal operation (active Analog Interface, if two Analog Interfaces installed)Flashing at 5 Hz = at least one error is active (highest priority)

DS33 green Gyro signal: DS34 = R, DS35 = S, DS33 = T, the LEDs show the direction and the polarity of the incoming signal. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave. 1-2 LEDs must be on. If no LEDs or all of them are on, the incoming signal is not correct. See Section 5.11.8 for the configuration of the analog gyro system and Figure 4-20 on page 71 for the connection of a gyro and a log.

DS33 red

DS34 green

DS34 red

DS35 green

DS35 red

DS36 green Reference voltage for DC stepper with half wave. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave

DS36 red

DS37 green Reference voltage for AC gyro. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave

DS37 red

Fuse

F1 For the fuses, see page 190.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

70




Fig. 4-20 Connection of log and gyro

The interfaces have to be configured by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section

RSTcommon

DC stepper system

DS 33, 34, 35are flashing greenDS 33, 34, 35are flashing green

DS 33, 34, 35are flashing redDS 33, 34, 35are flashing red



In DC stepper systems, the signals can beswitched by mechanical contacts or also by semi-conductors. See the following example:


( common - high )

+ ( - )

Gyro

AC System 50 HzAC System 60 Hz

Gyro (Synchro)

Parameter = “DC Stepper Positive”Analog Gyro SystemParameter = “DC Stepper Positive”Analog Gyro System

Parameter DC Stepper NegativeAnalog Gyro System = “ ”Parameter DC Stepper NegativeAnalog Gyro System = “ ”

Parameter = “DC Stepper Negative”Analog Gyro SystemParameter = “DC Stepper Negative”Analog Gyro System

Parameter DC Stepper PositiveAnalog Gyro System = “ ”Parameter DC Stepper PositiveAnalog Gyro System = “ ”

REF 1RSTREF 2 (reference

common)REF 2 (reference

common)2422

25 25

25 25

25

22 22

22 22

22

21

21 21

21 21

21

20

20 20

20 20

20

23TB

TB TB

TB TB

TB

TB TBGND (common)

VX (speed)6

8

R R

R R

S S

S S

T T

T T

common common

common common

+ -

+ -

1.) DC Stepper System 2.) DC stepper system

3.) DC stepper system 4.) DC Stepper System

( common - ground ) ( common - ground )

( common - high ) ( common - high )

GND (common)

VX (speed)6

87

5432

VY (drift)

LOG YPM (+/-Y)LOG XPM (+/-X)WT (Water Track)BT (Bottom Track)

1-axis log connection to Radar 2-Axis Log connection to Radar

Analog InterfaceAnalog Interface

Analog Interface Analog Interface

Analog Interface Analog InterfaceAnalog Interface


Analog Interface

1 Log SP

Analog InterfaceLOG

GYROGYRO

ztr1

_124

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

71

5.11.8 on page 127 for further information.




Functional Description

The RDC is equipped with 4 serial interfaces for the connection of the ship’s navigation sensors. If nosensors (gyro/log) with serial outputs are available, an interface extension like an Analog Interface mustbe used. Two extension units (Analog Interface or COM Expander) can be connected for redundancypurposes. For the correct installation, see the description of the jumper settings.

The AIS interface (TB10...16, J1) is available from Rev. 03 on.

The interfaces for an analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and a pulse log are described in Section 9.3,E x t e r n a l I n t e r f a c e s on page 204.

If two Analog Interfaces are used in one system, they must be addressed by means of TP99.

4.5.10.1 Analog Gyro

By the detection of the inputs R,S and T, every change in the gyro state can be recognized. The detectedbit combination is coded in Gray Code. The direction of the turn can be calculated by means of a compar-ison with the value measured before. The measured difference of bearing is added or subtracted to/froma defined start value. The typical resolution (changeable by parameterization) is 1/6°.

The actual gyro value is written to the CAN bus (Nav Bus) as a 16 bit item of datum. If the value doesnot change, it is transmitted to the CAN bus every 300 ms. New values are transmitted at least every20 ms.

Gyro sensors whose R,S,T detection is synchronized by a reference signal have a reference timeoutcontrol.

The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. Ifno signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.

4.5.10.2 Pulse Log

The ship’s speed can be processed from the pulse log signal. The Analog Interface measures the timebetween two rising edges of the signal. By means of the formula v = s/t (t = measured time, s = distanceper pulse (parameter)) the speed can be calculated.

Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY

The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:

Input Function

XPM X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be configured in the maintenance menus.

YPM Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be configured in the maintenance menus.

BT Bottom track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be configured in the maintenance menus.

WT Water track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be configured in the maintenance menus.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

72

ST2 External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler input by jumper settings.




4.5.10.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface

This assembly is used for signal matching (hardware) to input-signals complying with the RS422standard. An integrated circuit is used which converts the input signal to TTL level. It can be inserted inAnalog Interfaces ≥Rev. 03.

This assembly processes signals in accordance with the RS422 standard for the connection of thePrimary Display Port of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit.

In the normal case, set position 2 - without handshake. The inputs are terminated by R1, R2 with 270 Ω.

Fig. 4-21 SH3014T203

S1 Output Signal

Position 1 With handshake

Position 2 Without handshake

z_tr1

_151

.jpg

S1

1Standard = 2

1

4

Pin 1, 2:not connected

Pin 3, 4:Default is no jumper on 3/4. Set a jumper on 3/4 to connect the ground of the signal source and the ground of the Display Electronics Unit. See Figure 4-22.

TTL TTLRS - 422

GND

A

B

Logic "1" Logic "0" 400 mV2 V min

A

B

Output+ 5 V

4 3

Input+ 5 V

A

B

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

73

Fig. 4-22 RS422 signals

MarkStopPar.87654321Start

00

z_si

_013

.eps




4.5.11 COM Expander GE3044G210

ztr1

_624

.jpg

12345

Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3

Plug

-in p

cb 4

1

11

Plug-in pcb 5

F1

11

TP12

TP11

TP21

S118 1

DS1 DS2 DS3

DS4 DS5 DS6

18

ONS1

1

1

TP22

ON

J7 Function 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board4 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board5/6 5 connected to 67/8 7 connected to 8

TP23 Termination Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.

TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22Manufacturer‘s use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers, and do not remove jumpers which have been set in the factory

TP41 Function Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2)

TP42 Function Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4)

TB6 Function 1 Digital input 1 (+)2 Digital input 1 (-)3 Digital input 2 (+)4 Digital input 2 (-)

TB7 Function 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)2 Alarm out 1 centre3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed)4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)5 Alarm out 2 centre (not used)6 Alarm out 2 break (not used)The relays are switched on if the pcb is working!

TB8 Mains supply1 PE2 N3 L1

TB1

12345

TB2

12345

TB3

12345

TB4

12345

TB5

1234

TB6

12345

TB7

6

1

3TB8 2

TP13

TB1...5 FunctionSensor interface,with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G2181 RxD +2 RxD -3 TxD +4 TxD -5 GNDfor all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1.

S1 Function1 OFF = COM Expander 1

ON = COM Expander 22 manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)3...7 no function (default = OFF)8 manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)

DS1...6 Function DS1 green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not usedDS2 green : UART2 working, red: UART2 error, off: interface not usedDS3 green : UART3 working, red: UART3 error, off: interface not usedDS4 green : UART4 working, red: UART4 error, off: interface not usedDS5 green : UART5 working, red: UART5 error, off: interface not usedDS6 red flashing at:

0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

74

Fig. 4-23 COM Expander pcb




4.5.11.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs

The interfaces TB1...TB5 can be converted in the same way as the interfaces of the RDC. The plug-inadapter pcbs must be inserted and fixed by means of a nut on the COM Expander pcb. The interfacescannot be used without an plug-in adapter pcb.

Plug-in pcb

No.

RS422 TTL TTY (20 mA current loop) RS232 RS485

TB GE3044G218 GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214 GE3044G218

1

1 RxD1 + RxD1 RxD1 + RxD1 RS485+ 1

2 RxD1 - GND RxD1 - GND RS485- 1



5 GND1 GND GND GND GND1

2






3






4






5






ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

75




4.5.11.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion

4.5.11.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211

Fig. 4-24 TTL plug-in pcb

Function

TP1, Input inversion

Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted

TP2, Output inversion

Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted

TTL

Output Input5.0 V

2.4 V

0.4 V

0 V

Logic "1"

5.0V

2.0 V

0.8 V

0 V

Logic "0"

Mark

StopPar.87654321Start

TTLTTL

ztr1

_614

.jpg

ztr1

_615

.eps

TP1

TP2

1

1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

76




4.5.11.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212

Fig. 4-25 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb

4.5.11.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214

Fig. 4-26 RS232 plug-in pcb

Function


Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted


Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted

20 mA

20 mA Logic "1"

0 mA Logic "0"

Mark

StopPar.87654321Start

+zt

r1_6

16.jp

g

ztr1

_617

.eps

TP1

TP2

1

1

TTL TTLRS - 232

Output Input+ 15 V

+ 5 V

- 5 V

- 15 V

+ 15 V

+ 3 V

- 3 V

- 15 V


Logic "0"Space

Logic "1"Mark

ztr1

_618

.jpg

ztr1

_619

.eps

TP1

TP2 TP3

1

1

1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

77

Function


Jumper on 1/2 = RxD invertedJumper on 2/3 = default (RxD not inverted)


Jumper on 1/2 = TxD invertedJumper on 2/3 = default (TxD not inverted)

TP3 Manufacturer‘s use




4.5.11.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218

The conversion of RS485 is available at the COM Expander only.

Fig. 4-27 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb

Function


RS422:Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted


RS422:Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted

TP3,Termination

Jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = termination resistor, jumper 3, 4, 5,6 must be set as described belowNo jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = no termination resistorJumper on 3/4 = termination with 1 kΩJumper on 5/6 = termination with 150 ΩJumper on 3/4 and on 5/6 = termination with 120 ΩSee page 44 for further information about the termination of the RS422 interface.

TP4 Jumper on 1/2 = set to 1/2 if the pcb is used for the COM Expander (default setting)Jumper on 2/3 = set to 2/3 if the pcb is used for the Interconnection Board GE3044G216

TTL TTLRS - 485

A

B



A

B

Output

0

+ 5 VInput

0

+ 5 V

A

B

TTL TTLRS - 422

A

B



A

B

Output

0

+ 5 VInput

0

+ 5 V

A

B

ztr1

_620

.jpg

ztr1

_621

.eps

ztr1

_622

.eps

TP3

1

11

1

TP4TP1TP2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

78




4.5.12 Operating Unit BD3027

Fig. 4-28 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing

The complete Operating Unit consists of four parts:- Trackball BD 3028- Radar Keyboard- Trackpilot Keyboard- Keyboard Controller

The three parts can be mounted separately. All Operating Units are equipped with the Trackball asstandard. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard can be mounted as add-ons or ordered exworks.

The Operating Unit is mounted in the console housings or in the desktop housing, or it can be deliveredseparately for shipyard installation purposes. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard have onlyone common Keyboard Controller.

4.5.12.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics

zt1r

_18.

jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

79

It is possible to connect up to four slave Operating Units or to install the Operating Unit at a distance tothe Display Electronics Unit. For these purposes, the Remote Keyboard Electronics is needed. See thetechnical manual of the Remote Keyboard Electronics for further information.




4.5.12.2 Trackball BD 3028

The Trackball consists of a ball and three function keys. Thefunction keys correspond in their purpose to the function keysof a PC mouse.

The interface of the Trackball unit is a PS/2 interface, whichis common for PC’s.

The Trackball is connected to the Display Electronics Unit bymeans of a cable of length 3 m with a standard PS/2connector. The electronics unit of the Trackball cannot beserviced. The setting of the jumpers must not be modified.

PS/2 connector pinning:

4.5.12.3 Radar Keyboard

The Radar Keyboard is connected to the KeyboardController in the Operating Unit’s housing.

The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to the sameKeyboard Controller. The Keyboard Controller offers aPS/2 interface for the connection to the Display Elec-tronics Unit. This interface combines the RadarKeyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard.

The keyboards require a separate DC supply for thebacklighting. The back lighting is adjusted together withthe back lighting of the Trackpilot Keyboard.

Pin Function

1 Data

2 -

3 GND

4 +5V

5 Clock

6 -

Trackball

zt1r

_19.

jpg

Radar Keyboard

zt1r

_20.

jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

80




4.5.12.4 Trackpilot Keyboard

The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to a KeyboardController in the Operating Unit’s housing. The RadarKeyboard is connected to the same KeyboardController. The Keyboard Controller offers a PS/2 inter-face for the connection to the Display Electronics Unit.This interface combines the Trackpilot Keyboard andthe Radar Keyboard.

The keyboard requires a separate DC supply for theback lighting. The back lighting is adjusted togetherwith the back lighting of the Radar Keyboard.

4.5.12.5 Keyboard Electronics

Fig. 4-29 Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller

Figure 4-29 shows the back of an opened Operating Unit. It is equipped with the Trackball and both

Trackpilot Keyboard

zt1r

_021

.jpg

zt1r

_086

.jpg Keyboard Controller

GE3048G200Socket for Controller

Connection cable

Trackball

Trackpilot Keyboard pcb Radar Keyboard pcb

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

81

keyboards. The Keyboard Controller can be connected to both keyboard pcbs. The connection cabletransfers the signals from one board to the other.

The keyboards are connected to the Display Electronics Unit by means of a cable of length 3 m with astandard PS/2 connector. The keyboards’ illumination is supplied with power via a separate cable.




The controller must be connected to the Radar Keyboard pcb. Only if no Radar Keyboard is installed, itmust be connected to the Trackpilot Keyboard.

The controller GE3048G200 is equipped with a PS/2 connector for the connection of an ASCII keyboard.The shield cover has a hole for the connector.

PS/2 connector pinning:

Pin Function

1 Data

2 -

3 GND

4 +5 V

5 Clock

6 -

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

82




4.5.13 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)

For the installation of aretrofit kit, see Section 5.15.

The RGB Buffer supplies upto three monitors with theincoming signal of theGraphics And Video Proc-essor (GVP).

The RGB Buffer receives thevideo signals (RGB) and thesynchronization signals(HSYNC, VSYNC) via theinterface J2. The monitorsmust be connected to the15-pin HD-Sub connectorsJ3, J4 and J5. Unusedoutputs must be terminatedby means of the DIP-switches (output RGB1cannot be terminated). Thedecoupling and amplificationof the signals are performedby two circuits per videochannel with five outputseach. The RGB Buffer circuits work with a constant amplification of 2 (+6 dB) and are optimized for moni-tors with internal termination.

The maximum cable length between the RGB Buffer and the monitor inputs is 50 m if an RGB coaxialcable is used via an additional adapter. The length of the VGA cable must not exceed 3 m. The cablemust be terminated. Usually, the monitors have an input impedance of 75 Ω, which is suitable for theRGB Buffer.

The RGB Buffer must be supplied with +/-12 V via the connector J1. The two voltage regulators generatean internal supply voltage of +/-5 V.

Fig. 4-30 RGB Buffer

J2RGB input

J3RGB1 output

J4RGB2 output

J1Supply

DS1

S1

ztr1

_010

.jpg

TP3

J5RGB3 output

TP2TP1

DS2

S3 S2 S1

1

4

ON

12.e

ps

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

75 Ohmcable 75 Ohm

75 Ohm

75 Ohmcable

AV=2

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

cable

cable

75 Ohm

AV=2

Red,output ofGVP

Red,output ofGVP

Red,output ofGVP

Red,output ofGVP

Input of buffer,J2_1Input of buffer,J2_1

S3_1

Output ofbuffer,J3_1




Output ofbuffer,Output ofbuffer,

termination-resistor ofmonitor1




ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

83

Fig. 4-31 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example

ztr1

_0

75 Ohm

75 Ohm

AV=2

S1_4

J5_1J5_1



ztr1

_012

.eps




Connectors

J1, Power Supply

Pin Function

1 -12 V

2 -12 V

3 GND

4 GND

5 +12 V

6 +12 V

7 GND

8 GND

9 n.c.

10 n.c.

J2, Video Input; J3, Output Monitor 1;J4, Output Monitor 2, J5 Output Monitor 3

Pin Function Pin Function

1 RED 9 n.c.

2 GREEN 10 AGND

3 BLUE 11 AGND

4 AGND 12 n.c.

5 AGND 13 Horizontal sync.

6 AGND 14 Vertical sync.

7 AGND 15 n.c.

8 AGND

LEDs

On Off

DS1 -5V VBB on -5V VBB off

DS2 +5V VCC on +5V VCC off

Test Pins

Pin Function Signal

TP1 VCC (Out) +5 V

TP2 AGND (Out) 0 V

Switches

S1, S2, S3 Termination

On 1)

1) Termination = 75 Ω to AGND; select if no monitor is connected

Off 2)

2) No termination; select, if monitor is connected

S1_1 Inactive

S1_2 Output 3, J5, blue terminated Output 3, J5, blue not terminated

S1_3 Output 3, J5, green terminated Output 3, J5, green not terminated

S1_4 Output 3, J5, red terminated Output 3, J5, red not terminated

S2_1 Output 2, J4, red terminated Output 2, J4, red not terminated

S2_2 Output 2, J4, green terminated Output 2, J4, green not terminated

S2_3 Output 2, J4, blue terminated Output 2, J4, blue not terminated

S2_4 Inactive

S3_1 Output 2, J4, H-sync terminated Output 2, J4, H-sync not terminated

S3_2 Output 2, J4, V-sync terminated Output 2, J4, V-sync not terminated

S3_3 Output 3, J5, V-sync terminated Output 3, J5, V-sync not terminated

S3_4 Output 3, J5, H-sync terminated Output 3, J5, H-sync not terminated

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

84

TP3 VBB (Out) -5 V


5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration


The BIOS of the system is configured ex works. A description of the settings is shown in Section 5.14.

The system configuration and most of the adjustments and settings can be performed by means of theSystem Maintenance Manager. All adjustments which have to be performed by means of hardwareelements are described in Section 4, F u n c t i o n a l D e s c r i p t i o n . For a guide through the setting-to-workprocess, see Section 6.

WARNINGFor the use of the different software versions, some prereq-uisites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e wfor further information.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

85



5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position


5.1.1 Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100)

The drive module consists of the diskette drive and two brackets. Depending on the fitting position of theDisplay Electronics Unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing or at the bottomof the housing. The Display Electronics Unit is delivered with the drive module mounted at one side ofthe housing. This version is needed in the case of console mounting. The diskette drive can be operatedthrough an opening in the cover of the housing.

Suitable openings and threaded bolts for the module exist in the side and in the cover of the housing.The opening which is not used must be closed by means of a dummy plate. Follow these steps to modifythe fitting position of the drive module:

1. Disconnect the electronics unit from the mains supply. Open the housing and disconnect thegrounding cable.

2. Carefully disconnect the data cable and the power supply cable from the diskette drive.

3. Remove the four screws of the drive unit.

4. Dismount the brackets and mount them as shown in Figure 5-1.

Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets

5. Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must beused to close the first opening which has been used so far.

ztr1

_602

.gif

For mounting at the side of the housing (the diskette drive is operated through an opening in the cover)

For mounting at the bottom of the housing (the diskette drive is operated through an opening in the side of the housing)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

86

6. A plate with adhesive tape is fixed inside the cover. This plate has to be stuck on behind theopening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.




Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive

ztr1

_605

.gif

Inside of the cover

Dummy plate

ztr1

_606

.gif

ztr1

_607

.gif

Diskette drive in the cover Diskette drive in the side

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

87

7. Fix the drive module by means of the four screws.

8. Connect the data cable and the power supply cable to the diskette drive.

9. Connect the grounding cable and close the housing.




5.1.2 Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100)

The drive module consist of the hard disk drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the diskette drive. Dependingon the fitting position of the electronics unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housingor at the cover of the housing. The electronics unit is delivered as a desktop version with the drive modulemounted at one side of the housing. This version is needed for the SCC console, the standard consoleand for desktop mounting. For the compact console and for bulkhead mounting, the fitting position of theelectronics unit is different and the position of the drive module must be changed.

Follow the steps to modify the fitting position of the drive module:

1. Disconnect the electronics unit from mains supply.

2. Open the housing and disconnect the grounding cable.

3. Carefully disconnect the data cables and the three supply cables from the drives. Depending on thedrives version, the cables of the hard disk drive and/or the DVD-ROM drive are connected by meansof an adapter. The adapter(s) may be fixed with hot melt adhesive and cannot be removed. Twodifferent types of supply connector are available in the electronics unit. The type which has to beused depends on the drive and the adapter. See Figure 5-3.

Power supplyconnectors for 5.25" drives

Data cable for hard disk and DVD-ROM drive. The cable is always connected to the IDE1 connector.

NOTE:The DVD-ROM drive is connected as a slave drive on the same data cable as the hard disk. It has no separate data cable.

Data cable of diskette drive

1

1

1

ztr1

_628

_mp.

jpg

Adapter

636_

mp.

jpg

Power supplyconnector for 3.5" drives

The power connector at the adapter must not be disconnected.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

88

Fig. 5-3 Disconnection of the drive cables

ztr1

_632

_mp.

jpgztr1

_




4. Unscrew the 4 nuts (1) at the brackets. Pull the module out of the opening and then lift it carefullyat the front to get the shield out of the opening. Then lift the complete module out of the housing. Ifnecessary, the shield can be turned by removing the nut on top of the shield. When fastening thenut again, ensure that the shield is adjusted in a way that the DVD-ROM drive can be openedwithout rubbing against the shield.

Fig. 5-4 Dismounting of the drive module

5. Unscrew the nuts (2) (see Figure 5-4) and disassemble the brackets. Change the brackets from theleft to the right and vice versa (1)! The brackets are different from each other. The brackets must bemounted with turning through 180° (2.). Do not fasten the nuts.

Fig. 5-5 Turning the brackets

ztr1

_629

_mp.

jpg

ztr1

_630

_mp.

jpg

11

22

Brackets

ztr1

_633

_mp.

jpg

ztr1

_634

_mp.

jpg

For the electronis unit in SCC console, standard console, desktop version

Shield

For the electronics unit in compact console

1. Change brackets

2. 180°

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

89

6. Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must beused to close the first opening, which has been used so far.

A plate with adhesive tape is fixed on the power supply unit. This plate has to be stuck on behindthe opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.




7. Connect the cables to the drives (the hard disk drive is themaster if only one data cable must be used for DVD-ROMdrive and hard disk) and mount the drive module at itsnew position. Be careful with the cables. They must notbe squeezed under the brackets and must not be led oversharp edges. Do not fasten the nuts (3).Adjust roughly the position of the drives before fasteningone of the nuts (2) on each side. Check the position byclosing the cover. The drives must fit into the opening.

Then adjust the position of the drive module and fasten the nuts (3). Check the position of themodule by closing the cover. The surface of the diskette drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the covermust be on the same level.

Then loosen the nuts (2) and adjust the drives so that they are at right angles to the opening (andtherefore at right angles to the brackets). Fasten the nuts (2).

WARNING:It is important that the drives are mounted without anytension. The drives must be mounted exactly in parallel andat right angles to the brackets. Avoid any torsion of thedrive module while mounting and adjusting it in the elec-tronics unit housing.

8. The data cable must not cover the memory modules or the processor fan!

9. Connect the grounding cable to the cover and close the housing.

ztr1

_635

_mp.

jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

90



5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing

5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing

The RADARPILOT 1100 can be upgraded to be a CHARTRADAR 1100 or it is delivered as a CHAR-TRADAR 1100 ex works. If the radar is delivered as a CHARTRADAR ex works, the CHART FunctionLicence Key is still stored in the radar and a sticker with the CHART Function Licence Key is fixed on theradar housing (fan outlet)

To enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities of a standard radar, the licence must be ordered. Thelicensing procedure must be performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key mustbe ordered when hardware components of the CHARTRADAR have been exchanged.

1. The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 onpage 120).

2. The Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by - e-mail ([email protected], working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),- fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or- phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).

The following information must be added:- Date of Commissioning- Name of the Service Engineer- Vessel / Yard / Build No.- Shipping Company- Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit

3. The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must beentered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities.

User Chart Objects

Even if the licensing is not performed, it is possible to display the User Chart Objects, which have beendefined on the connected CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOTmust be configured as chartserver (see the technical manuals of the CHARTPILOT for further informa-tion).

5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing

The charts are licensed, installed and maintained at a CHARTPILOT which must be connected. See thetechnical manual of the CHARTPILOT for further information.

The CHART Function Licence Key is still stored in the MULTIPILOT ex works and a sticker with theLicence Key is fixed on the radar housing (fan outlet).

If the licence key has not been generated so far, it must be ordered. The licensing procedure must beperformed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key must be ordered when hardwarecomponents of the MULTIPILOT have been exchanged.

1. The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 onpage 120).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

91

2. The Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by - e-mail ([email protected], working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),- fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or- phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).



5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing

The following information must be added:- Date of Commissioning- Name of the Service Engineer- Vessel / Yard / Build No.- Shipping Company- Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit

3. The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must beentered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the MULTIPILOT functionalities.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

92



5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration


NOTE:The radar and the AIS itself must be restarted after any change in the configuration for the AIS. Otherwisethese modifications may have no effect.

NACOS xx-5 and RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 Systems

In Radar 1100 series systems or if the radar is part of a NACOS xx-5 system, the radar must be param-eterized for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400, because the interfaces of the radar are used for theship’s sensor data output. Follow the instructions in Section 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3.

5.4.1 Requirements

The following hard/software must exist for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400:

- Analog Interface GE3044G207 for the connection of the AIS Primary Display Port with SH3014G203,RS422 interface adapter (plug-in pcb for the Analog Interface) or

- Ethernet network adapter

5.4.2 Installation and Cable Connections

1. Installation:See the technical manual of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 for information regarding the installation of theantennas and the electronics unit.

2. Power supply:The power supply and the antennas must be connected as described in the technical manual of theUAIS DEBEG 3400.

3. Sensor interfaces:The sensor input channels of the AIS electronics unit (connector 3) must be connected to one of theserial I/Os of the Indicator (Interconnection Board GE3044G216, TB1). The baud rate of the outputof the serial interface of the radar is always the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unitwhich is connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.

Fig. 5-6 Interfaces for ship’s sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400

4. Data link for display and operating data via Ethernet LAN:The UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit must be connected to the Ethernet LAN of the radar/MULTI-

Interconnection Board(Each of the 4 serial interfaces of theDisplay Electronics Unit can be used.This is only an example.)

(Each of the 3 serial interfaces S1,S2, S3 of the UAIS can be used.This is only an example.)

Ship's Sensor Data

75 GNDChannel 1 -Channel 1 +

TxD 1 -TxD 1 +

GNDConnector 3TB

65

43zt

r1_6

09.e

ps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

93

PILOT system. An Analog Interface is not necessary for the connection of the AIS in this case.




5. Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (COM Expander):The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to a serialinterface of the COM Expander (TB1...5). The plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218 must be connectedto the corresponding socket of the COM Expander pcb.

Fig. 5-7 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander

6. Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (Analog Interface):The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to the serialinterface of the Analog Interface (TB10,11,14...16).Important! See Section 3.2.3 on page 37 for systems with more than one Analog Interface.

Fig. 5-8 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface

7. The following interfaces of the UAIS are not connected to the radar:- Pilot Port (must be accessible for the pilot)- Long Range Port (must be connected to a long range communication system)- UAIS DEBEG internal position system (can be used as position sensor)- UAIS DEBEG internal alarm relay (can be connected to an alarm system)

5.4.3 Configuration

The following parameters must be set:

1. System LayoutPath:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > AISThe AIS and its connection to the system must be defined by means of the settings Not Connected(default), Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to LAN.

COM expander


UAIS DEBEG 3400Primary Display Port

71 Output +AIS RxD, Input +Output -AIS RxD, Input -Input +AIS TxD, Output +Input -GND

AIS TxD, Output -GND

Connector 2TB1...5

5361

45

82

ztr1

_643

.eps

Analog Interface


UAIS DEBEG 3400Primary Display Port

810 Output -AIS RxD, Input -Output +AIS RxD, Input +Input -AIS TxD, Output -Input +GND

AIS TxD, Output +GND

Connector 2TB

61451

1516

711

ztr1

_642

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

94




2. Administration data:Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > Adminis-tration

Parameters (these data are transmitted via VHF and must be filled in):- Vessel- Call Sign- MMSI Number- IMO Number- Type of Ship or Type of Ship Coded as NumberThe setting of the Type of Ship parameter influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu. Thelist of the Cargo or Ship Type menu in the Voyage Data menu is adapted to the Type of Shipsetting. If the type of ship is not available in the list box Type of Ship, it is possible to selectthe corresponding number in the Type of Ship coded as Number data field. This parameteralso influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu.

Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > SystemPosition and other Ship Dimensions

Parameters (see Figure 6-4 on page 163 for further information):- Distance to Bow, Distance to Stern, Distance to SB, Distance to P

Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Basic Radar

Parameter:- AIS Lost Target without AlarmDefault setting is 16.0 NM. If an AIS target is lost outside this range, no alarm is generated.

3. Interface for the Ship’s Sensor Data:The serial I/O to which the Sensor Input Channel of the AIS electronics unit is connected must beparameterized as ship sensor data output.

Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Inter-faces > Serial Interfaces 1...4 > Output

Parameter:- Serial Output used as (select AIS Navigation Data)

Note: The baud rate of the output is the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unit whichis connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.

By means of this parameter, the repetition rate of 1 Hz is automatically set for the telegrams HDT,ROT, VBW, GLL, VTG, DTM. It is not necessary to configure the Output > Transfer parameters.

4. Interface for the Primary Display Port (not necessary if the AIS is connected via LAN):

Connection via Analog Interface:The serial interface of the Analog Interface must be configured as AIS interface.Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >Serial I/O 1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

95

Parameters:- Driver (set to AIS Automatic Ident System)- Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)




Connection via COM Expander:The serial interface to which the AIS is connected must be configured as AIS interface.Path:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >Serial I/O X

Parameters:- Driver (set to AIS Automatic Identification System)- Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)

5. AIS configurationPath:System Maintenance Manager > Configure > AIS

Parameters:- AIS Channel (AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice)- Distance of GPS Antenna Longitudinal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system

position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96)- Distance of GPS Antenna Transversal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system

position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96))- AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1...S3 (select IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud)

Fig. 5-9 System position (example)

NOTE:In addition, it is necessary to configure the AIS in the System Layout menu of a connected CHART-PILOT 1100 to enable the AIS functions of the CHARTPILOT.

- Transversal +

- Lon

gitu

dina

l +

LT

P1 P2

RX

RS

LT = Log Transducer, defines the system position10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB

RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m distance longitudinal to system position

RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m distance longitudinal to system position

P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m distance transversal and -85 m distancelongitudinal to system position

P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m distance transversal and -85 m distancelongitudinal to System Position

PAIS = AIS GPS antenna, -2 m distance transversal and -110 m distancelongitudinal to system position

-4 m

8 m8 m

-82

m-8

0m

-85

m

-110

m

10m

4 m

PAIS

120

m

-2 m

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

96



5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300

5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300

1. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > VDR

Select Connected to VDR DEBEG 4300.

2. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > VDR

The following parameters define from which Indicator the VDR (Voyage Data Recorder) is suppliedwith radar pictures.

Parameters:

Main Radar:Select Indicator 1...X.The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s. The radar picture isstored on the final recording medium and on the hard disk of the VDR.

Additional Picture Stored from Radar:Select None/Indicator 1...X.The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s additionally. The radarpicture is sent with an offset of 7.5 s to the picture of the main radar. If a further Indicator isselected (see parameter below), the picture of that Indicator is transmitted alternating with thepicture of this Indicator, so that the additional pictures are sent by each Indicator every 30 s.The radar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.

Additional Picture Stored from Radar:Select None/Indicator 1...X.The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture additionally. The radar picture issent alternating with the first additional picture m.a., so that it is transmitted every 30 s. Theradar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.

3. Interfaces of the radar must not be configured. The VDR is supplied with data via the Ethernet LAN.For further information, see the documentation of the VDR.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

97



5.6 System Maintenance Manager


ATTENTIONThe window of the System Maintenance Manager partly covers the PPI.Therefore, the System Maintenance Manager may be started only if thesystem is not being used for navigation.

Some of the system maintenance functions must not be used by unauthorized persons. The registersconcerned are locked by means of a password.

Fig. 5-10 System Maintenance Manager window

5.6.1 Trackball and Cursor

If you are already familiar with graphic man-machine interfaces,you might be able to skip this section. Before doing so, youshould have a look at the picture of the Trackball beside this text.

Every operating step begins with the operator moving the cursorby means of the Trackball to a particular place on the window (toa text item, a numerical value, a symbol on the PPI or anydesired place on the PPI). The next step is always the pressingof one of the Trackball keys. In the following, this brief pressing

ztr1

_104

.gif

Register

Restart the radar

Exit the Mainte-nance Manager

For the use of an additional ASCII keyboard

Do key

More keys for left-handed and right- handed people

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

98

of the key is called clicking. What then happens depends on thekey used, the element on which clicking took place, and the oper-ating situation, and is the subject of these instructions.

The cursor has a resting position to which it goes 30 secondsafter the last operating process. This position is situated besidethe PPI, below the ACQ TGT area. This function is switched off in the service windows. If the cursor

ztr1

_102

.jpg




is situated outside the PPI, it is shaped like a hand or an arrow. Inside the PPI, it is a cross. Thisfunction is switched off if the System Maintenance Manager is opened, because its window canpartly cover the PPI.

Do KeyThe most important key is the middle one. Almost all data areas react to this key, which performsthe functions that are needed the most frequently. In the following instructions, it is called the "Dokey". In the following, "clicking" always means clicking with the Do key unless stated otherwise.

MORE KeysThe two keys situated above the Do key are called "More keys". They have identical functions (forergonomical operation for left-handed people and right-handed people). Not all elements which canbe operated by means of the Do key react to the More key also, and if they do, then always withfunctions other than those of the Do key. Furthermore, by pressing of the More key, open menus orlists can generally be closed without any results, and inputs can be aborted.

- If an ASCII keyboard is connected, the check box ASCII Keyboard in the lower left-hand part of thewindow "System Maintenance Manager" must be set ( appears).

- All windows and dialogue boxes can be left by clicking on the symbol in the top right-handcorner of the window or dialogue box or by clicking on the Exit button.

- The windows and dialogue boxes can be moved. Place the cursor on the upper bar of the windowuntil the cursor changes from a single arrow to a quadruple arrow. Press the Do key and keep itpressed while moving the window to the new position by means of the Trackball. Release Do to fixthe window or dialogue box at the new position.

- If figures or letters have to be entered, a small window with akeyboard appears. If an ASCII keyboard is connected(suggested for convenient parameterizing), it can be used tomake all the entries needed. All entries are shown in the styl-ized display in the keyboard window. If no ASCII keyboard isconnected, the entries must be performed via the Trackball and the Do key. Place the cursor on abutton (figure or letter) of the keyboard window and click with Do on this button. The selected figureor letter appears in the stylized display of the keyboard. To complete an entry, click on the Enterbutton of the keyboard.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

99




5.6.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager

To enter the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Menu button. The message "CAUTION - Systemwill leave normal operation mode" appears. Click on Yes to enter the Maintenance Manager. The window"System Maintenance Manager" is opened, where six different registers can be selected with the Track-ball.If the one of the registers is selected, a dialogue box for the password is displayed(not for Selfcheck, Telemonitoring Data and Tools).

To enter the password, click into the data field and type the password by means of anadditional ASCII keyboard or by means of the virtual keyboard by using the Trackballand the Do key. Confirm with Enter. If the service switch on the RDC is activated, theinput can be passed by clicking on OK without entering the password.

Each time the registers Service orConfigure are selected, the technician isasked to fill in a service report. It is highlyadvisable to state all modifications, repairsand maintenance work in this report. Therequest can be suppressed by activating thecheckbox Do not show again. Thecheckbox is deactivated automatically byleaving the System Maintenance Manager.

5.6.3 Service Log-in Levels

Two log-in levels are available for the service technicians. The standard log-in level (service) offersaccess to all relevant parameters. For more complex installations, the advanced service levels must beselected.

The service log-in level is determined by means of the password.

The currently selected service level is displayed in the title of the System Maintenance Manager window.

ztr1

_130

.gif

Service Report

ztr1

_133

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

100



5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager

5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager

Tools

See page 120

See page 115

See page 114See page 112

See page 109

See page 105

See page 139

See page 102

See page 98

See page 127

See page 134

See page 134

System Maintenance Manager

Maintenance

Utilities...

Date & TimeDisketteMap Transfer/Delete

KeyboardBuzzerMap Storage TestRDC Test Pictures

VersionsFaults

These three menus are also available for operators, see also the Operating Instructions.

System Layout

Radar Indicator

Transceiver

Indicator 1...5

Transceiver 1...5

AdministrationSerial Interfaces

Serial I/O 1...4

System/Ship Parameters Ship DataBasic RadarStartup Sensor Selec.

Selfcheck

Telemonitoring Data

Configure

Sensor Interfaces Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 GyroPulse LogSerial I/O 1...5

NACOS 1) TRACKPILOTENGINE INTERFACE

Planning System 1)

Service Indicator Monitor AdjustRDC Service + Adjust

Software Update (+PCBs)PCB Software Update

Transceiver Setting to Work HeadmarkerTrigger DelaySTC DelayVideo MBSPMA DisplayPM AdjustInterswitch Input Adjust

Advanced SettingsMagnetron HoursAntenna Information

MagnetronTuning OffsetSTC Compensation

Indicator

Menu

Serial I/O Monitor

See page 140

See page 145

See page 150

ARPA

Track Transfer/Delete 2)

See page 135Conning 3)

Fault History

ECDIS 4)

See page 138Chart Database

See page 93AIS

Check Alarm I/O

Config. File Info See page 114

VDR See page 97

Run from DisketteRKE Settings 1)RKE Software Update 1)

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

101

Fig. 5-11 Menu structure

See page 151

NACOS 1)

Commissioning Data

TRACKPILOTENGINE INTERFACE 1) Appears depending on the system layout

2) Only if no CHARTPILOT is connected3) For CHARTRADAR or MULTIPILOT4) For MULTIPILOT

See page 150

Config TransferService Report



5.8 Tools Menu

5.8 Tools Menu

5.8.1 Date & Time

By means of the menu Date &Time the date and time of thecomputer (motherboard) can beset. The upper data field showsthe existing date and time. Tomodify the date and/or time, clickinto one of the three data fieldsof Set Time or Set Date andenter a new value by means ofan optional ASCII keyboard orwith the aid of the up and downbuttons to the left of the datafields. If the button Apply &Save is clicked, the values aresaved, but the radar must berestarted to activate the newdate and time. The date and timeof the computer are differentfrom the system date and time.The system date and time isdetemined by the GPS data. The date and time of the computer are used for file operations (e.g. dateand time of the R10K.sam file) and in can be used if the system time from the GPS data is not available.

It is possible to set the system date and time with the computer date and time by means of the Set toComputer Time button.

5.8.2 Map Transfer

By means of the function Map Transfer, themaps which have been edited on the Indi-cator can be saved to a diskette or to anotherIndicator connected to the system. The mapscan also be read from a diskette or fromanother Indicator and saved onto the localIndicator.

To transmit maps to another Indicator ordiskette, the Transmit button must activated.

The destination for the transfer must beselected from the Destination listbox. Thefiles to be transferred must be selected in the

Tools / Date & Time

IncreaseDecrease

Data fieldszt

r1_1

34.g

if

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

102

Files in Source window. By clicking onAdd>> the files are copied with their directorystructure to the Files to Transfer window.The transfer is started by clicking onTransfer.

Tools / Map Transfer, Transmit

ztr1

_156

.gif



5.8 Tools Menu

To receive maps from another Indicator or torestore them from a diskette, the Receivebutton must be activated.

The source of the maps must be selectedfrom the Source listbox. The files to be trans-ferred have to be selected in the Files inSource window on the left. By clicking onAdd>>, the files are copied with their direc-tory structure to the Files to Transferwindow. The transfer is started by clicking onTransfer.

By means of the Clear button, the selectedfiles can be deleted from the Files forTransfer window on the right. As long as filesare shown in this window, it is not possible tochange from Transmit to Receive or viceversa.

Existing files are overwritten with both func-tions. A warning message appears in this case and the transfer must be confirmed.

It is not possible to transfer maps from or to RADAR 9xxx Indicators.

5.8.3 Map Delete

If the memory of the RDC is not sufficient forthe map files or if maps are not needed anylonger, they can be deleted.

First of all, the source must be selected fromthe Delete in listbox. The files to be deletedhave to be selected in the Files in ... windowon the left. By clicking on Add>>, the files arecopied with their directory structure to theFiles to Delete window on the right. To startthe deletion, the button Delete... must beclicked. The warning message that appearsmust be confirmed.

By means of the Clear button, the selectedfiles can be deleted from the Files to Deletewindow.

NOTE:The diskette can contain maps, tracks andthe configuration files. The free space on thediskette can be checked by means of the Diskette function.

Tools / Map Transfer, Receivezt

r1_1

31.g

if

Tools / Map Delete

ztr1

_008

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

103



5.8 Tools Menu

5.8.4 Track Transfer

If a planning system like the CHARTPILOT isconnected, the button Track Transfer is notvisible. The tracks must be handled bymeans of the planning system in this case.

With Track Transfer, the tracks which havebeen edited on the Indicator can be saved toa diskette or to another Indicator connectedto the system.

Tracks can also be read from a diskette orfrom another Indicator and stored in the localIndicator.

The operation of the Track Transfer functionis the same as for the Map Transfer function.

5.8.5 Diskette

The Floppy tools provide the following func-tions:

Info...: Shows the capacity, the used spaceand the free space of the diskette in thediskette drive.

Erase...: Deletes all files on the diskette inthe diskette drive. Caution: All files on thediskette will be lost.

Format...: Formats the diskette in the diskettedrive. Caution: All files on the diskette will belost.

Tools / Track Transfer

ztr1

_195

.gif

Tools / Floppy

ztr1

_157

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

104



5.9 Selfcheck Menu

5.9 Selfcheck Menu

Click on the register Selfcheck in theSystem Maintenance Manager. Selectthe unit that has to be tested from thelist and start the test with the Start Testbutton. An additional window especiallyfor the selected selfcheck appears. Toclose the window and stop the test, clickon the symbol in the top rightcorner of the additional window. Thetest pictures can be stopped by clickingon the Stop button in the additionalwindow.

If errors occur during a test, a corre-sponding message is shown in the fieldSelfcheck Messages.

5.9.1 Keyboard

The Keyboard Selfcheck tests the Trackball unit and the (optional) keyboard(s). After the start, a sche-matic picture of the operating elements appears.

When the keys are operated, the corresponding key of the schematic picture is pressed down virtually,which means that this key is functioning properly.

If the boxes situated at the rotary knob symbols fill up in red in accordance with the operation of the rotaryknobs, this means that the rotary knobs are functioning properly.

5.9.2 Buzzer

After the start, a list of various acoustic alarm signals appears. If, when one of the buttons in the list hasbeen clicked, the relevant acoustic signal is sounded, this means that the acoustic alarm is OK.

5.9.3 Map Storage Test

The Map Storage Test generates test maps, stores them to the IDE memory module and deletes themafterwards. Click on Start Test to begin the test. If the test has been passed successfully the message

Selfcheck menu

ztr1

_140

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

105

"Map Storage Test : passed" appears in the display field. If the memory failed the test, error messagesappear and the IDE memory module must be exchanged.



5.9 Selfcheck Menu

5.9.4 RDC Test Pictures

After the start, a list of the various test pictures that can be displayed appears. By means of these testpictures, you can determine whether the video processing of the radar data converter (RDC) is workingproperly.In the case of pictures 1 to 3, only the brilliance adjustment function is active; in the case of picture 4,the adjustment functions for gain and range are also active.

Picture 1

In each row of blue to yellow squares, theyellow intensity must increase from left toright.

The squares move slowly downwards.

Each square must be uniformly coloured.

Picture 2

In the middle square, 16 colours are displayedcyclically one after another.

ztr1

_105

.gif

ztr1

_106

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

106



5.9 Selfcheck Menu

Picture 3

Each of the four sectors has eight intensities.

They are moved round in the clockwise direc-tion.

Picture 4

The illustration shows the test picture in thefollowing case:- Range: 6 NM- Gain: Normal setting

Picture 5

The illustration shows the test picture in thefollowing case:- Range: 6 NM- Gain: Maximum

If the gain is reduced, the intensity of the ringsdecreases, beginning with the inner rings ofthe sets of six.

The signal for this picture is fed into the RDCbehind the input potentiometer. If the testpicture is displayed as described, the analogand the digital part of the RDC are workingproperly.

ztr1

_107

.gif

ztr1

_108

.gif

ztr1

_109

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

107



5.9 Selfcheck Menu

5.9.5 ARPA

By means of the ARPA function test, theoverall performance of the ARPA function(generated by the RDC pcb) can be assessed.This should be done periodically.

Select the 6 NM range and select ARPA fromthe list. The individual echoes displayed aresynthetic targets:

- It must be possible to acquire themmanually.

- When the acquisition / guard zone isplaced over one or more targets, auto-matic acquisition must take place,together with the associated symbols andalarms. The targets must be trackedautomatically.

- All targets travel along with the own ship.Therefore, their true courses and true speeds must be the same as the own ship's course andspeed.

The ARPA test picture is not available if the system is not an ARPA radar.

ztr1

_127

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

108



5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu


All information which has been listed stays in the list. It is possible to scroll through this list by means ofa scrollbar. The list must be deleted manually by means of the Clear button.

5.10.1 Listing the System Faults

Existing system faults (which generate the alarm indication SYSTEM FAULT xxxxx) can be listed. Thisfunction is also accessible to the operator because, in the event of a fault, a service visit can be betterprepared or omitted altogether if the service station can be informed of the fault code list beforehand.

The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list. New informa-tion is added to the list, so that it is possible to scroll through this list. The list can be deleted by clickingon the Clear button.

Present Faults

Fig. 5-12 System fault list (present faults)

To list the present system faults, click on Faults. All system faults that exist at the time are listed. Newfaults are not added to the list.

If the Refresh function is switched on, new faults are added to the list and the error detection of the radaris more sensitive. A small square lights up in the Faults button if this function is activated. To disable thefunction, click on the Faults button again.

For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 and

ztr1

_111

.gif

Deletes the display of data

Generates an indication of the soft-ware version, see Section 5.10.2.

Generates a list of the system faults that exist

Refresh switched on: The fault list is continually updated

List of present system faults

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

109

Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.




Fault History, System Integrity Faults

Fig. 5-13 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults)

To show the history of system faults, click on Fault History. All system faults that appeared so far arelisted. The column Count shows how often the error appeared in the past. The date and the time corre-sponds to the date and time when the error appeared for the first time.

For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 andSection 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.

Below the Fault History, the System Integrity Faults list shows the processes which have caused asystem crash.

Deletion of the Fault History

With the Clear button, the display is cleared, but not the history. To delete the error history, click on FaultHistory by means of the More key.

Saving the Versions and Faults on a Diskette

By means of the Save to Disk button, the ship data, the software version list, the Fault History and theSystem Integrity Fault list are saved as an ASCII file on a diskette. This ASCII file is also shown in theTelemonitoring Data window (except of the ship data). The Fault History is deleted automatically.Existing files on the diskette are overwritten.

ztr1

_600

.gif

Deletes the display of data

Generates an indication of the soft-ware version, see Section 5.10.2.

Generates a history of the system faults and deletes the fault history (More key)

History of the system faults

Saves the errors and the version data on a diskette

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

110




5.10.2 Determining the Software Versions

To display the software versions, click on Versions. The software version of the radar version and someof its main components are indicated on the display.

Fig. 5-14 List of software versions

The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list so that newinformation is added to the list when the Version button is clicked. It might be necessary to scroll throughthis list. The list can be deleted by clicking on the Clear button.

Remote Keyboard Electronics

For master/slave or remote installations, at least two Remote Keyboard Electronics units are needed.These components are listed as follows (example for one master with three slaves):

RKE*/aMST 1 GE3048G200 = Master with address 1, "*" = connected to this electronics unitRKE /aSLV 5 GE3048G200 = Slave with address 5RKE /aSLV 6 GE3048G200 = Slave with address 6RKE /aSLV 7 GE3048G200 = Slave with address 7

The software version of the pcbs is shown as well.

The mode (master/slave) and the numbers of the Remote Keyboard Electronics are set by means of DIPswitches on the Remote Keyboard Electronics pcb. For further information, see the corresponding tech-nical manual.

ztr1

_142

.gif

This deletes the display of data

List of software versions

Scrollbar

Software Version of the radar

Software version of thesoftware in the IDE memory module

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

111



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11 Configure Menu

By means of the Configure menu, the system parameters can be entered. It is organized into severalsubmenus as System Layout, Radar, AIS, Sensor Interfaces or NACOS.

The size of the tree in the left-hand window depends on the settings which have been made in theSystem Layout menu. Only components which have been defined in the system layout appear in thetree.

5.11.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons

Defaults Button

The button Defaults sets all parameters of the opened window/menu and of the submenus to the defaultvalues. Menus in parallel or menus of higher levels are not set to the default values.

Save Button

To save modified parameters in the IDE memory module and in the component which has been selectedfor configuration, click on Save.

Leaving without Modifications

If parameter settings have been changed, the operator is asked about saving the modifications when heis leaving the menu. To save the settings, click on Save & Exit. To drop the modifications and keep theold settings, click on Cancel.

Saving Parameters in the Analog Interface/COM Expander

The parameters are saved online in the IDE memory module and in the component. The parameters aretransmitted to the Analog Interface automatically each time while booting the system.

Saving Parameters in the TRACKPILOT

The parameters are saved by means of the Save button in the IDE memory module and in the TRACK-PILOT. When the TRACKPILOT is selected, the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT are comparedwith the ones in the IDE memory module‘s ones.

5.11.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters

By clicking Save, the parameters of the selected Transceiver are stored in the IDE memorymodule and in the TCU. Some of the parameters work immediately after clicking Save (forexample, the parameter Azimuth Pulses per Revolution).

Some of the parameters only take effect after a restart (for example, the parameter SpeedCapability). When such a parameter has been modified and saved, a warning wich requests the

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

112

restarting of the system appears when the System Maintenance Manager is going to be exited. If therestart is not performed, the parameter has no effect.



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure

On the left-hand side of the configure screen, the menu tree is displayed. This tree can be expanded byclicking on the + symbols. Then the next level of the branch behind the symbol + is shown and the +becomes a -. To hide the twig structure, click on the - symbol. Use the button Expand below the tree toshow the complete tree structure. Return to the simplified display with Collapse.

Fig. 5-15 Configure menus

Select an item of the tree to display the appropriate list boxes on the right-hand side of the configurewindow. The selected item is marked in the tree. The items can be selected directly by means of theTrackball and its DO key.

Drop-down list boxes can be opened by clicking on . The arrow changes into if the list box is opened.Click on to close the list box.

ztr1

_143

.gif

Shows the complete tree structure

Shows the following branch

Shows all items of this menu item (this Browse button disappears)

Shows all items (all Browse buttons disappear)

View with compressed tree and reduced list.

ztr1

_144

.gif

Hides the complete tree structure

Hides the following branch

Reduces the list (all Browse buttons appear)

Click Exit to leave the config-urator.

View with expanded tree and expanded list.

Click to open the drop-down list box with all available settings

Scrollbars

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

113

With the buttons Compress and Expand, the list of visible data fields or list boxes can be reduced orextended. For example if one parameter has to be set for all Transceivers, the data fields of all Trans-ceivers can be collected in a group by means of the button Compress and can be made visible in asubmenu of their own by clicking on the button Browse. If the buttons Expand and Compress have nofunction, they are coloured.



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.4 Configuration File Info

The data fields of the Configuration File Info show the date and the time of the last modification in theconfiguration file and the number of the Indicator where the modification has been performed.

5.11.5 System Layout

This menu defines which components exist in the system.

System Layout Configure > System Layout

Local Indicator Number (this one) Shows the Indicator (number) of the operated Indicator. The Indi-cator number must be set by means of S1 on the RDC (see Section 4.5.4 from page 53 onwards).

Indicator

> Indicator 1... 5 Select Not Connected (default) / RADARPILOT 1100 or MULTIP-ILOT 1100Defines the type of Indicator. If MULTIPILOT 1100 is selected, the ECDIS menu is available for this Indicator.

Transceiver

> Transceiver 1 ... 5 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).

Interswitch (PCI) Select Connected or Not Connected (default).If more than two Indicators or Transceivers are connected in a system, the Interswitch is needed to switch the TVA signals.

Sensor Interface

> Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Sensor interfaces are the - Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface) for the connection of an

analog gyro, an analog log and an AIS, the - COM Expander with 5 serial interfaces.NOTE:If "Not Connected" has been selected, it is not permissible to connect an Analog Interface. This can cause problems on the CAN bus.

NACOS Configuration (not for standard radar systems)

> TRACKPILOT Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a TRACKPILOT is connected to the system.

> ENGINE INTERFACE Select Connected, Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether an ENGINE INTERFACE is connected to the system.

This is the NACOS Backup System 2 Select No (default) or YesIn case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system must be divided in two subsystems. This parameter should be set to Yes only, after consulting the manufacturer.

Ethernet LAN Select One Net (default) or Two Sub-netsIn case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system must be divided in two subsystems, or alternatively, the Ethernet

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

114

LAN can be divided in two sub-nets. This parameter should be set to Two Sub-nets only, after consulting the manufacturer.

Planning System



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.6 System / Ship Parameters

By means of this menu, the basic data of the ship and of the system can be entered.

> Connected Planning System Select No/1/2/3 or more than 3Select No for standard radar systems.RADARPILOT:Defines whether one or more CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 are connected as a planning system. User Chart Objects which have been defined at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed in the radar PPI or the radar can be licensed as a CHARTRADAR.MULTIPILOT:If no CHARTPILOT is connected, it is not possible to perform the installation, update and licensing of charts.

AIS Select Not Connected (default)/Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to LANDefines whether an AIS is connected to the system and if it is connected via LAN or to a sensor interface.

VDR Select Not connected (default) or connected to DEBEG 4300.Defines whether the radar supplies a VDR DEBEG 4300 with data via Ethernet LAN.

System / Ship Parameters Configure > System / Ship Parameters

Ship Data

> Administration Common ship data. Enter comments and names for:- Vessel (must be set if an AIS is connected)- Shipping Company- Flag- Call Sign (must be set if an AIS is connected)- Phone- FaxShip Data for AIS: (values must be set!)- MMSI Number

Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number for the AutomaticIdentification System (AIS) (default = 0)

- IMO NumberIMO Number used for the Automatic Identification System (AIS)(default = 0)

- Type of ShipSelect Not defined/Passenger Ship/Cargo Ship/Tanker/High Speed Craft/Pilot Vessel/SAR Vessel/Tug/Port Tender/Anti-Pollution Vessel/Law Enforcement Vessel/Medical Transports/Fishing Vessel/Towing Vessel/Sailing Vessel/Pleasure Craft/WIG or Only Coded as NumberSets the type of ship which is transmitted by the AIS.

- Type of Ship Coded as NumberSets the type of ship coded as a number for the AIS

The parameters Type of Ship and Type of Ship Coded as Number are coupled with each other. If a type of ship has been selected, the corresponding number is set automatically.

> System Position and other Ship The system position defines a coordinate origin for the position

System Layout (cont.)Configure > System Layout

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

115

Dimensions calculation (normally the location of the DOLOG transducer). These values are also very important if an AIS is connected.

> Distance to Bow Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Distance to Stern Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Distance to SB Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).



5.11 Configure Menu

> Distance to P Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).

> Length at Waterline Set a value in 0.1 m stepsThe parameter specifies the ship’s length between the perpendicu-lars for squat calculation.

> Nominal Speed Set a value in 0.1 kt steps (default = 20.0 kt).Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.

> Acceleration Set a value in 0.005 m/s² steps (default is 0.020 m/s²).Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.

> Maximum ROT Alarm Limit Set a value in 1 °/min steps (default is 0 °/min = no check).The ROT sensor (gyro) is checked against this limit.

> Position Quality Check Select Off (default) / Standard Quality / Medium Quality or Low Quality.The position sensor is checked against unexpected differences between the position values.

> Minimum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 0.03 NM...1.00 NM (default is 0.25 NM).Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be performed.

> Maximum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 1.00 NM...3.00 NM (default is 2.00 NM).Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be performed.

> Gyro Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Gyro Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).

> On/Off The following menu items appear only if On is selected.

> Gyro against Magnetic Compass Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).Gyro monitoring against the magnetic compass (HDG/MAG).

> Gyro against COG of MainPosition Sensor

Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the main posi-tion sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/COG).

> Gyro against COG of RedundantPosition Sensor

Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the redundant position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/COG).

System / Ship Parameters (cont.)Configure > System / Ship Parameters

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

116



5.11 Configure Menu

> Ignore Gyro against COG aboveROT of:

Set a value in 1°/min steps (default = 0°/min = Off).Ignore the difference between gyro and COG above a rate of turn of this value. If the ROT value is large, the COG of the position sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro which causes an increase in the difference. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor.

Example: ROT 1 = 30°/min, ROT 2 = 120°/min,Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°- ROT 30°/min: Factor = 0.75 -> 10.0°x0.75 = 7.5, alarm triggeredIf a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that parameter.

> Ignore Gyro against COG belowSpeed of

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).Ignore the difference between gyro and COG below a speed of this value. If the speed is reduced, an increasing difference between the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a drift. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redun-dant Position Sensor

Below the speed "1", the difference between gyro and COG is ignored. A factor is calculated for speed values between "1" and "2". The difference between gyro and COG is multiplied by this factor.Example: Speed 1 = 5 kt, Speed 2 = 20 kt (Nominal Speed)Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°- Speed 20 kt: Factor = 1.0 -> 10.0°x1.0 = 10.0, alarm triggered- Speed 5 kt: Factor = 0.25 -> 10.0°x0.25 = 2.5, no alarm triggered- Speed 4 kt: Factor = 0 -> 10.0°x0.0 = 0, no alarm triggeredIf a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that parameter.

> Full Sensitivity Gyro against COGabove speed of

This parameter is the value "Speed 2" which is shown in the diagram above. Usually, the nominal speed of the ship should be set.

> Speed Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Speed Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).


FactorHeading/COG

ROT2

1.0

1 = actual ROT for the example

2 = value of parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of

1

FactorHeading/COG

Speed

1 = value of parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of

2 = value of parameter Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above Speed of

21

1.0

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

117

> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu items appear only if On is selected.

> Speed against RedundantSpeed Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).Speed monitoring against the speed of the redundant speed sensor (SPD/...LOGx).



5.11 Configure Menu

> Speed against SOG of MainPosition Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the main position sensor (SPD/SOG).

> Speed against SOG ofRedundant Position Sensor

Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the redundant position sensor (SPD/SOG).

> Position Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Position Monitoring functions which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).

> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu items appear only if On is selected. The following menu item appears only if On is selected.

> Position against RedundantPosition Sensor

Set a value in 1 m steps (default = 0 m = Off).Position monitoring against the position measured by the redundant position sensor (POS).

> Additional Alarms Setup Menu Select No or Yes (default = No)Enables the operators menu Alarms > Settings. By means of this menu the alarms POSITION STATUS CHANGED, LOG STATUS CHANGED and BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM can be deactivated.

Basic Radar

> Video Anti Clutter Sea Select On or Off (default = On).This parameter is valid for all radars in the configuration.

> ARPA Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...20.0 NM (default = 19.5 NM)If an ARPA target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.

> AIS Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...99.0 NM (default = 16.0 NM)If an AIS target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.

TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select None (default) or Turn Headmarker by 180 degTurns the Headmarker by 180° caused by an external contact on TB2/15, 16 on the Interconnection Board (used for double end ferries).

TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select Not connected (default) / Double End Ferry, HM TurnFor double end ferries, an external contact at TB2/15,16 deter-mines whether the AFT or FWD bridge is activated.The following parameters are visible only, when Double End Ferry, HM Turn has been set.

FWD Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator, when the FWD bridge has been activated.

AFT Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator, when the AFT bridge has been activated.

Startup Sensor Selection Defines with which sensors the system works after a startup.

> Heading Select Manual Heading or Heading Sensor 1 (default).The use of manual heading is not permissible. This setting may only be used for special purposes, such as exhibitions.

> Speed Select Manual Speed / Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 / Log 1 (default) or Log 2

> Position Select Estimated Position / Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Position Sensor 6.


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

118

> Time Select Time from Internal Clock / Time from Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Time from Position Sensor 6 / Time Sensor 1 or Time Sensor 2.The ZDA message of the NMEA definitions is used to transfer the data.



5.11 Configure Menu

> Time from Selected PositionSensor

Select Yes (default) or No.The setting "Yes" overwrites the setting of the parameter Time from Internal Clock. The time of the currently selected position sensor is used if "Yes" is selected.

> Differentiated Heading From Selected Heading Sensor is the only available choice.ROT calculated by differentiation of the heading.

> Default Depth Select Manual Depth / Depth Sensor 1 (default).

> Default Wind Select Manual Wind / Wind Sensor 1 (default).

> Default Weather Select Manual Weather / Weather Sensor 1 (default).


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

119



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.7 Radar

Via the Radar menus, the Transceivers and the Display Electronics Units can be configured.

NOTE:To avoid mistakes caused by different parameter settings originating from various Display ElectronicsUnits, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit.

Afterwards, all parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of adiskette to the other radars or MULTIPILOTs.

Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.

NOTE:In the menus, the CHARTRADAR 1100 and the MULTIPILOT 1100 are often not mentioned explicitly.The settings are the same as for the RADARPILOT 1100, except for the menus which are intended espe-cially for the CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100.

5.11.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration)

Administration Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration

Installed Type of Tracking Facility Select ARPA or EPA (default).EPA = Electronic Plotting AidARPA = Automatic Radar Plotting AidIf no ARPA hardware is installed and the parameter is set to "ARPA", the systems works as an EPA system.The MULTIPILOT is always an ARPA system.

Connected Monitor Select Other Types (default) or select the type of monitor that is connected to the Electronics Unit from the list.

Keyboard Select Trackball only (default) / RADAR Keyboard or RADAR + TRACKPILOT Keyboard.

Name Name of Indicator; enter by virtual keyboard or by ASCII keyboard.

Alarm Relays Activation Delay Enter a value in 1 s steps (default = 30 s), range = 1 s...120 sSets the delay for the activation of the alarm relays.

System Fault Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if any system fault occurs.

Dangerous Target Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if a dangerous target has been detected, i.e. if the CPA value and the TCPA value are less than the set values.

Lost Target Alarm Select Disabled (default) / Enabled.Specifies that the external alarm has to be triggered when a tracked target is lost.

Guard Zone Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.Specifies that an external alarm must be triggered when a target has been detected in the guard zone.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

120



5.11 Configure Menu

Allowed to be Sensor Master Select Yes or No (default).An Indicator can become Sensor Master if the sensors- Gyro- Log- Positionare connected to the RDC of this Indicator, the Analog Interface (GE3044G207) or the COM Expander.

If these three sensors are connected in redundancy to a second Indicator, this second Indicator has to be parameterized as sensor master, too. When such a system is started, the Indicator which becomes operable first is determined to be sensor master.

In the case of a defect of the sensor master, the second Indicator becomes the sensor master automatically.

CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Function Select Available or Not Available (default).For a RADARPILOT 1100 this parameter defines whether the radar can be operated as a CHARTRADAR 1100 with a display of elec-tronic seacharts in the PPI. The User Chart Objects of a connected CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed without activating the CHARTRADAR functionalities.

For a MULTIPILOT 1100, this parameter must be set to activate the full ECDIS functionality.

CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identifica-tion Code

Displays the Unique Identification Code of this CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 unit. Modifications of this number cannot be saved. The number is used to generate the CHART Function License Key. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the procedure.

CHART Function License Key If the correct license key has been entered here, the chart/ECDIS functionalities can be used at this Indicator. If no valid key is avail-able, the access to the chart/ECDIS database is locked. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the proce-dure.

Conning Select Available or Not Available (default).This parameter defines whether the Conning Display is available or not. This parameter is available at CHARTRADARs or MULTIPI-LOTS only. If the CHART Function License Key is not valid, the Conning functions are not available.

Based on Specification Select IEC 60936-1 (default) or IEC 60936-3.The approval is based on the IEC specification. If IEC 60936-3 is selected, the chart cannot be displayed in Head-Up mode and the chart areas are always filled.

Radar PPI Radius Select Use Default (default) / Standard or Maximize.Always select Use Default. Standard or Maximize should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division.

"Maximize" enlarges the size of the PPI display to fulfil the 16" radar type approval requirements with the Monitor AZ 3063. "Standard" shows the PPI in the standard size (which is smaller than 16" with the Monitor AZ 3063). When "Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corre-sponding to the monitor setting Connected Monitor. If a TFT monitor which requires the maximized display is used together with CRT monitors, it is possible to configure these CRT monitors with "Maximize" to get the same display as on the TFT monitor.

Administration (cont.)Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

121



5.11 Configure Menu

Monitor Aspect Ratio Select Use Default / 4/3 or 5/4.Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or service division.

Monitor resolutions of 1600x1200 or 1024x768 have an aspect ratio of 4/3. A resolution of 1280x1024 has an aspect ratio of 5/4. CRT Monitors can display resolutions with both aspect ratios, although the CRT’s own aspect ratio is usually 4/3. Consequently, if a CRT Monitor is driven with the resolution of 1280x1024, not the complete size of the CRT is used and a blank band appears. This can be corrected by adjusting the screen size settings. As a result of this "compression" from 5/4 to 4/3, circular objects on the screen appear slightly oval.TFT Monitors must be driven with their own 4/3 aspect ratio. When "Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automati-cally, corresponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. In case of the Monitor AZ 3063, the resolution which must be selected with 1280x1024 by means of the DIP switches on the RDC is auto-matically processed to a resolution of 1280x960 which corresponds to an aspect ratio of 4/3.

Head-Up PPI Orientation Select Bow-up (standard) or Stern-up.Bow-up is the default setting.The stern-up PPI orientation should be used if the radar monitor is installed the other way round, so that the operator is watching in the direction of a stern window.

Monitor Control Interface Select Indicator (COM 1) (default) or RKE (J2).When a Remote Keyboard Electronics is used, the serial interface of the monitor can be connected to the RKE or to COM 1 of the Indicator. The interface which is used must be selected.

Transfer of ARPA Alarms toCHARTPILOT

Select Yes or No (default).Defines whether ARPA alarms like Lost Target and Dangerous Target are displayed at connected CHARTPILOTs. The alarms cannot be acknowledged at a CHARTPILOT.

Central Dimming Adjustment Select No (default)/Yes/User ControlledNo: Dimming must be set at every single Indicator.Yes: Modifications of the dimming settings at one Indicator are transferred to all other Indicators and they are set if the central dimming function is enabled at these Indicators.User Controlled: An additional button is displayed in the Brilliance menus. By means of this button, the Operator can enable or disable the central dimming function for the Indicator.

Double End Ferry Select No (default)/Yes, FWD Bridge Indicator/Yes, AFT Bridge Indicator/Yes, only one Bridge (at Centre)Defines to which bridge the Indicator belongs (on double end ferries).

Administration (cont.)Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

122



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces)

Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4

Driver Select None (default) / NMEA183 (IEC 61162-1/2) / C. Plath (serial Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro).Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the driver which has been chosen.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2):

> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.

> Serial Gyro

> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is connected.

> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Display Selected Gyro Select Yes or No (default)Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch-over unit) are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for example, PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is displayed.

> Position

> Position Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL, GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.The following items appear only if Position has been defined as Connected.

> Channel Select 1 /.../ 6 (default = 1).Channel (multiplexer) identification.

> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Position sensor antenna, position distance (longitudinal) in m rela-tive to the system position.

> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Position sensor antenna, position distance (transversal) in m rela-tive to the system position.

> Sensor Number Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor must be supplemented by a serial number, and if so, which number.

The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection and in the status display. With the aid of the sensor number func-tion, it can be arranged, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".

> GLL, GGA Selection Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA message.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

123

Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the GLL message.

> Use Speed from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the speed sensor. Set to No for BSH or DNV-W1.



5.11 Configure Menu

> Use Time from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time sensor.

> Speed

> Speed Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW, VHW is connected.The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as Connected.

> Channel Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (longitudinal) rela-tive to system position.

> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (transversal) rela-tive to system position.

> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.

> Longitudinal Speed FilterConstant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).Filter X Constant.

> Transversal Speed FilterConstant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).Filter Y Constant.

> Time

> Time Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is connected.The following item appears only if Time has been defined as Connected:

> Channel Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.

> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output messages.

> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output TTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative

> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output RSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 (cont.)Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

124

> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).



5.11 Configure Menu

> Output RTE/WPL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> RTE Mode Select: Working Route (default) or Complete RouteWorking Route: the last waypoint and the following 4 waypoints are transmitted.Complete Route: the complete route with all waypoints is trans-mitted.

> WPL Remark Select: No Remark (default) or Append RemarkNo Remark: the remarks of a waypoint are not transmitted.Append Remark: the remarks of the waypoint are transmitted.

> RTE Message Route Identifier

Select: With Track Number (default) or Track Number 0000With Track Number: the original number of the system track is transmitted.Track Number 0000: the system track is always transmitted with the number 0000.

> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.Defines the type of the serial output.

> Depth Select Connected or Not Connected (default).The following items appear only if Depth has been defined as Connected:

> Depth Sensor 1 Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Depth Value Select Below Transducer (default) or Below KeelBelow Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.

> Wind Select Connected or Not Connected (default).

> Channel Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Weather Select Connected or Not Connected (default).

> Channel Weather Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Route Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not connected if a CHARTPILOT is connected to the system.The following items appear only if Route has been defined as Connected:

> Channel Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4

> Catalog The catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor must be entered in this input field.The name will be used by the operator. It is advisable to enter the name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.

> TRACKPILOT Track Mode Select Disable or EnableIf it is sure that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satis-factory, it can be admitted for use as a track for the TRACKPILOT.

Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz:

> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Display Selected Gyro Select Yes or No (default)Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example, via a switch over unit)

Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4 (cont.)Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

125

are connected to the radar system.



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers

When a Transceiver has been selected, it may happen that it takes a few seconds until the TCU param-eters have been loaded. A message appears which shows the progress of loading data. If the Indicatordoes not make contact with the TCU of the selected Transceiver, a warning appears. In this case, theparameters shown in the menu do not correspond to the parameters which are actually set in the TCU.

Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5 Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5

Type of Generation Select RADAR 1100 S-Band / RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW / RADAR 1100 X-Band 25 kW

For 1000 Series Transceiver:

> Additional Information Click into the data field and enter any comments.

> Frequency Deviation Enter a value for the constant PRF deviation in the range -5% to 5% (default = 0).This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence (interference) between several radars on the ship.

> Sector Blanking (See form sheet on page 305)

> Number of Blanking Sectors Select None / 1 /.../4.The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and Stop Angle. Not allowed for the main navigation radar.

> Blanking Sector X Start Angle Start angle of the Blanking Sector X.

> Blanking Sector X Stop Angle Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.

> Antenna

> Speed Capability Select None / Single (Low Speed) / Dual (default) or Single (High Speed).Set to Single (High Speed) on HSC.

> Distance Longitudinal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Distance between the installation location of the radar Scanner and the system position along the ship’s longitudinal axis.+ = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.

> Distance Transversal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Distance between the installation position of the radar Scanner and the system position along the ship’s transverse axis.+ = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system position.

> Height above Sea Level Enter the height of the antenna above the sea level in metres, in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m)

> Beam Width Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2°, S-Band = 1.8°.3 dB points:5 ft X-Band Scanner:1.5°8 ft X-Band Scanner:1.0°14 ft S-Band Scanner:1.8°

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

126



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.8 Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander)

By means of the Sensor Interface menu, the optional Analog Interface or the COM Expander can beconfigured. The interfaces can only be parameterized if they have been configured in the system layout.

> Azimuth Pulses per Revolution X-Band1. Pulser HEDS-5605 at the intermediate shaft = 1920.0,2. Modification Kit GR3017G027 with slotted wheel at the interme-diate shaft = 540.03. Combined Azimuth / Headmarker Pulse Generator with slotted wheel at the hollow shaft = 72.0S-Band1. Old pulser (34 teeth chopper wheel) = 830.02. New pulser (17 teeth chopper wheel) = 415

See the description of the different azimuth pulse generators in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for further infor-mation.

> Antenna Motor Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz (default).

> Last Modification Date Displays the date of the last modification of the Transceiver adjust-ments.

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2

Sensor Interface 1...2 Click on Sensor Interface 1 or Sensor Interface 2 to configure the sensor interface as Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface), Interface Expander or COM Expander.

If the system is equipped with an Interface Expander and an Analog Interface, the Interface Expander must become the Sensor Interface 1 (the Interface Expander must be the master, because it offers additional serial interfaces).

The following menu items Gyro and Pulse Log are available for the Analog Interface and the Interface Expander only.

Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5 (cont.)Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

127



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface

Gyro

> Heading Sensor Channel Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Analog Gyro System Select No Analog Gyro Connected (default) / DC Stepper Positive / DC Stepper Negative / DC Positive Halfwave / DC Negative Halfwave / AC Gyro.

DC Stepper:The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the signal voltage is a smoothed DC voltage.See Figure 4-20 on page 71 and the description of the LEDs DS 33, 34, 35 in Section 4.5.10.

Halfwave:The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the signal is an unfiltered DC voltage, generated from the 50 Hz or 60 Hz supply voltage.

AC Gyro:Input indicating that the signal is transferred by means of a synchro.

> Increment Select 1/6 deg Step (default) / 1/3 deg Step / 1/48 deg Step / 2/3 deg Step (not type-approved).Matching the gyro interface of the Analog Interface to the transmis-sion ratio (resolution):

1/6 degree Step:- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/6 degree course change.- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 1

degree course change.1/3 degree Step:- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/3 degree course change.- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 2

degree course change.1/48 degree Step:- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/48 degree course change.2/3 degree Step (not approved):- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 2/3 degree course change.- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 4

degree course change (90:1).

Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degrada-tion of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore, this setting should not be used where:- the radar installation is intended to meet the IMO/IEC Radar

Performance Standards- type approval certification is required- the ARPA option is fitted.

> Reference Select Not Connected (default) / 50 Hz / 60 Hz.Not Connected must be selected if REF1 and REF2 are not connected to the Analog Interface.

> Gyro Input Voltage Select Low (default) or HighSets the gyro input voltage (exciter voltage of the stepper or maximum stator voltage of the synchro signal). Always select the "Low" setting. Set to "High" only if it is not possible to get rid of

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

128

appearing phase errors. After being set to high, the gyro must be tested properly while turning.

> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the error input definition.

Pulse Log

> Speed Sensor Channel Select Log1 (default) or Log2.



5.11 Configure Menu

> Distance Longitudinal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Position distance (of speed log transducer) (longitudinal) relative to system position.

> Distance Transversal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Position distance (of speed log transducer) (transversal) relative to system position.

> Sensor Interface Identifier Select Log (default) / Log 1 / Log 2.Name of the sensor which is being displayed on the screen.

> Log Type Select No Pulse Log Connected (default) / One Axis Log / Two Axis Log.Sets the log typeOne Axis Log:

Speed in the longitudinal direction only is transferred (e.g.DOLOG 21).

Two Axis Log:Speed in longitudinal and transverse direction is transferred (e.g. DOLOG 22 or DOLOG 23).

> Increment Select 125 Pulses/NM / 200 Pulses/NM (default).Resolution in pulses/NM.

> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the error input definition.

> Bottom Track (BT) Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the Bottom Track Input definition.

Not connected:The BT status signal input is not evaluated.

Connected:The BT status input is evaluated.

Inverted Input:This function should be selected if- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must

be interpreted as bottom track signals and- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must

not be interpreted as bottom track signals.This function should not be selected if- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must

be interpreted as bottom track signals and- the open contact means, that the existing speed signals must

not be interpreted as bottom track signals.

If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as "not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track signals.

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 (cont.)Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

129



5.11 Configure Menu

> Water Track Input (WT) Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the Water Track Input definition.

Not connected:The WT status signal input is not evaluated.

Connected:The WT status signal input is evaluated.

Inverted Input:This function should be selected if- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be

interpreted as water track signals.- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must

not be interpreted as water track signals.This function should not be selected if- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must

be interpreted as water track signals.- the open contact means that the existing speed signals mustnot be interpreted as water track signals.

If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as "not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track signals.

> XPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the XPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed.

- Not connected:No sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed.

- Connected:Sign signal is transferred.

- Inverted Input:Speed ahead corresponds to open contact.

> YPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the YPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed.

- Not connected:No sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed.

- Connected:Sign signal is transferred.

- Inverted Input:Drift to starboard corresponds to open contact.

> VX Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the VX Input definition, longitudinal speed.

> VY Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.Sets the VY Input definition, transverse speed.

> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).Sets the VX Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how intensely fluctuations of the longitudinal speed signal received from the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter of the 1st order).

> Transversal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).Sets the VY Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how intensely fluctuations of the transverse speed signal received from the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 (cont.)Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

130

of the 1st order).



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

5.11.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

Serial I/O 1 (for Analog Interface)The following interface types can be parameterized:

Driver Select None (default)/AIS Automatic Ident System or NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2).

Settings for AIS

> AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice.

> Type of AIS Select DEBEG 3400 (default) or Other.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2)

> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) or 38400.

> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not connected (default).

> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice..

> Display Selected Gyro Select Yes or No (default)Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch over unit) are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is displayed.

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

Serial I/O 1...5The following interface types can be parameterized:

Driver Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) /AIS Automatic Identification System / Bridge Alarm System BAS 40PSets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the driver which has been chosen.The serial I/O 5 can be used as NMEA interface only.

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1)

> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformant.

> Position

> Position Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL, GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.

The following items appear only if Position has been defined as Connected.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

131

> Channel Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position Sensor 1).Channel (multiplexer) identification.

> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in m relative to the system position.



5.11 Configure Menu

> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in m relative to the system position.

> Sensor Number Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor must be supplemented by a serial number and, if so, which number.The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection and in the status display. The sensor number function can be used to arrange, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".

> GLL, GGA Selection Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA message.Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the GLL message.

> Use Speed from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the speed sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.

> Use Time from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time sensor.

> Speed

> Speed Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW, VHW is connected.

The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as Connected.

> Channel Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.

> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.

> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.

> Longitudinal Speed FilterConstant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).Filter X Constant.

> Transversal Speed FilterConstant

Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).Filter Y Constant.

> Time

> Time Select Connected or Not Connected (default).Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is connected.

The following item appears only if Time has been defined as Connected:

> Channel Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 (cont.)Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

132

> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output messages.

> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.9 AIS

See Section 5.4 from page 93 on for the connection and configuration of an AIS.

> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative

> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).

> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.Defines the type of the serial output.

Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:

> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) Select Connected or Not ConnectedThe following item appears only if the Bridge Alarm System 1 has been defined as Connected.

> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier Select a number from 1...31The identifier usually corresponds to the number of the Bridge Alarm System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20 alarm inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes. The Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs each.

Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 (cont.)Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

133



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.10 NACOS

(Not available for standard radar systems)

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT ElectronicsUnit and in the RDC. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters from theTRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and compares them with the parameters which are stored inthe RDC. If the parameters are different, a dialogue box appears and it must be decided whether the setof parameters from the RDC is to be loaded into the TRACKPILOT or vice versa.

Fig. 5-16 TRACKPILOT configuration manager

The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the Configuremenus and/or in the Service menus. While performing the setting-to-work, the settings should beperformed in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by anymenus and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOTimmediately, and so the Service menus should be used during trials.

For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE), see the technical manualof the TRACKPILOT.

5.11.11 Planning System


ztr1

_188

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

134

> Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targetsSelect the Indicator from which the CHARTPILOT should get the ARPA targets.

> Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOTSelect True or False (default)Defines whether the sensor information is transferred to the CHARTPILOT via Ethernet.



5.11 Configure Menu

> C-Map IdentifierDisplays the C-Map Identifier of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.

> ARCS User Permit NumberDisplays the ARCS User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-PILOT.

> ENC User Permit No.Displays the ENC User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-PILOT.

> Security Unique Identifier (UID)Displays the status information for the UID (UID existing, date and time of storage).

5.11.12 Conning

The Conning functions are available at a CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100 or CONNINGPILOT1100.

By means of these parameters, the display of the conning data is configured. To use the Conning func-tionalities, some settings are necessary at the CHARTPILOT. See the technical manual of the CHART-PILOT 1100 (NACOS xx-5) for further information. The parameters are available only if the parameterConfigure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration > Conning has been set to Available. Ifno correct CHARTRADAR Function Licence Key has been entered, the conning display does not work.

Conning Configure > Conning

Shaft Parameters

> Number of Shafts Select None (default)/1 Shaft/2 ShaftsThe following items appear only if the parameter Number of Shafts has not been defined as None.

> Scale RPM Bar Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM)The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

> Scale Rudder Display Select 25° (default)/50°/75°The scaling of the "Rudder Display" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

> Number of Clutches Select None (default)/1 Clutch....6 ClutchesDefines the number of clutches.

> Clutch Label Select Yes or NoDefines whether the clutch symbols are shown with a label or not.

> Display Power Bar Select Yes or NoDefines whether the power bar is displayed or not.

> Display Pitch Bar Select Yes or NoDefines whether the pitch bar is displayed or not.

Scale Off Course Bar Select Auto (default)/5°/15°/30°/50°The scaling of the display "Off Course Deviation Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

135

Scale Off Track Bar Select Auto (default)/50 m/100 m/250 m/500 m/1000 mThe scaling of the "Off Track Deviation Bar (XTD)" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar Select 10 kt/15 kt/20 kt/25 kt (default)/30 kt/35 kt/40 ktThe scaling of the "Longitudinal Scale Bar" (longitudinal speed) is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.



5.11 Configure Menu

Display Power Bar Select MW Scale (default) or % ScaleScaling of the power bar with % or MW.

Scale Shaft Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MWThe scaling of the "Shaft Power Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Generator Parameters

Number of Generators Select None/1 Generator...6 Generators

The following item appears depending on the setting of the param-eter Number of Generators. If Number of Generators has been set to None, no parameter is available.

> Scale Generator Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MWThe scaling of the "Generator Power Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.

Availability of Additional Displays

> Display Weather Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual weather display is avail-able

> Display Draught Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual draught display is avail-able

> Display Consumption Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual consumption display is available

> Display Generator Power 1 Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (Norcontrol interface)

> Display Generator Power 2 Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (analog and ISL interface)

> Remaining Power Displayedas Used Power

Select Yes or No (default)Defines whether the analog input for the remaining power is inter-preted as input for the used power.

> Display Generator Power 3 Select On or OffDefines whether an additional, individual generator power display is available (NMEA interface)

Displacement Table The displacement table should be used only, if the values for the displacement have been calculated by the yard. If no values are available, the table should not be filled in.

> Draught 1...10 Set the draught values in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m)

> Displacement 1...10 Set the displacement value to the corresponding draught value in 1 t steps (default = 0 t)

Squat Coefficient The squat coefficient should be filled in only, if the value has been calculated by the yard. If no value is available, the default value 1.5 must be used.

Conning (cont.)Configure > Conning

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

136



5.11 Configure Menu

Azimuth Thruster Parameters

> Azimuth Thruster 1...4

> Azimuth Thruster x For Azimuth Thruster 1:Select Not connected / Stern Thruster / Stern Starboard Thruster- Ships with a stern midshp AZT: select Stern Thruster- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Starboard Thruster;

AZT 2 must be set to Stern Port Thruster.

For Azimuth Thruster 2:Select Not connected / Stern Port Thruster- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Port Thruster;

AZT 1 must be set to Stern Starboard Thruster.

For Azimuth Thruster 3:Select Not Connected / Bow Midship Thruster / Bow Starboard Thruster / Center Thruster / Behind Center Thruster- Ships with one additional bow AZT: select Bow Midship

Thruster.- Double end ferries with four main AZTs: select Bow Starboard

Thruster.- Ships with one additional center AZT: select Center Thruster.- Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:

select Behind Center Thruster.AZT 4 must be set to Before Center Thruster.

For Azimuth Thruster 4:Select Not connected / Bow Port Thruster / Before Center Thruster- Double end ferries with for main AZTs: select Bow Port

Thruster.- Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:

select Before Center Thruster.AZT 3 must be set to Behind Center Thruster.

> Add a Label (Number) to theThruster Display

Select No (default) or Yes.The number is added automatically and cannot be edited.

> Add a Propeller to the ThrusterDisplay

Select No (default) / Pushing Propeller or Pulling Propeller.Defines what kind of symbol for a propeller is added to the thruster display.

> Thruster Angle Display Mode Select 0 to 360° (default) or ±180°.Defines whether the thruster angle is displayed in a range of 0...360° or ±180°.

> Thruster Angle Display Color Select No (default)/Red if Angle & RPM are positive/Green if Angle & RPM are positiveDefines whether the thruster angle values are displayed colored and the display colour for positive values of Angle and RPM.

> Colored Angle Display Limit Enter a value in 1° steps (default = 1°).Input of the thruster angle at which the colour changes from white to red/green if the parameter Thruster Angle Display Coloured is set to Yes.

> Scale Orientation Select 0° up (default) or 180° up.Defines the orientation of the azimuth thruster scale.

> Maximum Thruster RPM Maximum value for the scale in revolutions per minute.

> Maximum Thruster Power Maximum value for the scale in MW.

Conning (cont.)Configure > Conning

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

22

3

3

44

33

Sternstarboard

Sternport

Bowmidship

Beforecenter

Behindcenter

Bowstarboard

Bowport

Stern

Centerzt

r165

4.ep

s

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

137



5.11 Configure Menu

5.11.13 ECDIS

The ECDIS menu is available only if at least one MULTIPILOT 1100 has been defined in the SystemLayout menus.

5.11.14 VDR

See Section 5.5 from page 97 on for the connection and configuration of a VDR.

ECDIS Configure > ECDIS > Chart Database

ENC Database

> ENC Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the ENC database is available

ARCS Database

> ARCS Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the ARCS database is available

C-MAP CM93/2 Database

C-MAP CM93/2 Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the CM93/2 database is available

C-MAP CM93/3 Database

C-MAP CM93/3 Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the CM93/3 database is available

Direct ENC Database

Direct ENC Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the Direct ENC database is available

Own Database

Own Database Select Yes (default) or NoDefines whether the Own database is available

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

138



5.12 Service Menu

5.12 Service Menu

The Service register offers the possi-bility of making adjustments while theradar is in operation. The settings whichcan be made by means of theConfigure register are the basicsettings.

For the first-time setting-to-work, it isnecessary to keep to a particularorder when making the adjustments.The order is shown in Section 6 onpage 157.

The tree shows all available submenus.By clicking on a + symbol, the tree isexpanded and the + becomes a -. Byclicking on -, the tree is compressedagain.

To make the complete PPI visible for measurements andadjustments, the main window of the System MaintenanceManager is closed if a submenu has been selected. A dialoguebox is opened on the right-hand side of the screen. Thisdialogue box contains an input field for the parameter value(s)and a display field which shows important existing settings andmeasurement values. By means of the list box, selöect theparameter which is to be adjusted.

To return to the System Maintenance Manager, this dialoguebox must be closed.

Service menu

Tree

ztr1

_135

.gif

Dialogue box for transceiver adjustments (example MBS)

Display field

ztr1

_136

.gif

Input fields

Parameterselection

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

139



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1 Indicator

5.12.1.1 Monitor Adjust

The monitor can be adjusted by means of an on-screen display. Thesize of the monitor is displayed. With the buttons Up and Down, firstthe OSD menu of the monitor is opened, then the parameter can beselected. With + and - the values can be set. Depending on the radarversion, the monitors and the handling of their OSD menus aredifferent. Some types are equipped with a switch "OSM / RS232". If itis necessary to operate the monitor with its own buttons or to adjust"Brilliance", the switch must be set to "OSM". To be able to operate theon-screen menus by means of the radar service menus, the switchmust be set to "RS232".

If the display color, the brightness or contrast are not correct or if thereare differences between monitors in one system, the monitor defaultsettings could be wrong. See Section 8.2.7 on page 184 for furtherinformation.

5.12.1.2 RDC Service and Adjust

The RDC Service and Adjust offers facilities for an automaticadjustment of the video offsets and tools for the advanced diagnosisof the TVA signal.

Usually, only the ADC Threshold function is used for the setting-to-work of the radar. The other functions are advanced tools for diag-nosis in case of problems.

Monitor Adjust dialogue boxzt

r1_1

37.g

if

RDC Service and Adjust

ztr1

_026

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

140



5.12 Service Menu

ADC Threshold Adjust (Video and ARPA Offset)

The following adjustment must be performed at every Indicator for allTransceivers.

1. The Transceiver must be selected (same way as in the normaloperational mode).

2. The Transceiver must be switched on and operated as master.

3. The Auto button must be clicked once. The values are meas-ured and saved automatically (PPI video offset, ARPA videooffset, GND reference).

4. The procedure must be repeated for all other Transceivers in thesystem.

It is possible to modify the values manually. The effect on the radarvideo can be watched in the PPI. The values can be reset to thecurrently saved values by means of the Revert button. It is stronglyadvised to use the values which have been determined by means ofthe automatic measurement function.

A/Polar-Scope-Display

The scope functionality can be used to display the TVA signal as inan oscilloscope.

In A-scope mode, the video signal is displayed in an x/y system ofcoordinates. The y-axis shows the video amplitude, the X-axis thedistance of the target. The parameters are the azimuth for the displayand the range. It is possible to set the range and the azimuth bymeans of VRM and EBL 1 or 2. The resolution of the Y-axis can bemodified.

In polar scope mode, the TVA signal is displayed in a circular mode.The azimuth of the displayed signals corresponds to the azimuth of the targets. The length of the signalcorresponds to the strength of the signal.

The ARPA PPI function shows the video signal which is used for the ARPA processing with the fixedrange of 20 NM.

Status displays

The status displays have the following meanings:

TRIGGER: green = trigger signal measured, red = no trigger system, insensitive = undefinedRDC SEA: green = Video STC on, insensitive = Video STC off

RDC Service and Adjust

ztr1

_027

.gif

A/Polar Scope Display

ztr1

_028

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

141

ARPA ON: green = ARPA working, insensitive = ARPA not workingVIDEO: green = video signals are transmitted to the main processor



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1.3 Check RDC Alarm IO

To check the function of the alarm relay, click on the buttons. The colour of theactivated buttons changes and the selected relay is activated.

The correct operation of the relays can be measured at the terminals of theInterconnection Board.

The Indicators Ack Buzzer (In 1) and External Input (In 2) show whether analarm signal is active at the alarm inputs of the RDC.

5.12.1.4 Serial I/O Monitor

By means of the Serial I/O monitor, the datacommunication between the 4 serial inter-faces of the RDC or the 5 se

rial interfaces of the COM Expander and theconnected ship’s sensors can be monitoredand saved on a diskette. To monitor theserial interfaces of the COM Expander, theIndicator to which the COM Expander isconnected must be the sensor master. Theinterface driver must have been configuredbeforehand (Section 5.11.7.2). The interfacemust be selected by means of the list box. Bymeans of the buttons Rx and Tx, it must beselected whether the outgoing or theincoming signals are monitored. If the buttonStart is clicked, the data is read anddisplayed in the display field. If the buttonClear is clicked, the display field is cleared. The protocol can be saved to a diskette by clicking on Saveto Disk. Existing protocol files on the diskettes will be overwritten.

ztr1

_187

.gif

Serial I/O Monitor

ztr1

_077

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

142



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1.5 Software Update (+PCBs)

RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100:

The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a diskettedrive. Five diskettes (GE3062G004, Order No. 390001277) areneeded:- Flash Update Facility Boot Disk- Flash Update Distribution Disk 1 of 4- Flash Update Distribution Disk 2 of 4- Flash Update Distribution Disk 3 of 4- Flash Update Distribution Disk 4 of 4

To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carryout the instructions on the screen. After the boot diskette has beeninserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. Theboot sequence is modified automatically for a diskette boot (no DIPswitches need to be set for the boot sequence). All other diskettes arerequested by messages on the screen.

After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to the normal operation and theradar must be switched off and then on again to reboot.

MULTIPILOT 1100:

The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a CD-ROM.The CD ROM RP3065G010 (Order No. 390001627) is needed.

To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carryout the instructions on the screen. After the CD ROM has beeninserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. Theboot sequence is modified automatically for a CD ROM boot (no DIPswitches need to be set for the boot sequence).

After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be setto normal operation and the MULTIPILOT must be switched off andthen on again to reboot.

NOTE:- The pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander/Analog Interface are automatically updated during the

process.- The TCU and the Analog Interface must not be updated at the same time from different Indicators.

This could cause problems on the CAN bus and the TCU could be set to an undefined status (andwould have to be exchanged in this case).

- In a NACOS, the software versions of all components must belong to the same NACOS softwareversion. See the product notes for further information about SW upgrade kits.

ztr1

_138

.gif

zmp1

_138

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

143



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.1.6 PCB Software Update

During a system software update, the pcbs TCU, RDC, Analog Interface and COM Expander are alsoupdated with the relevant software version. If one of these pcbs has been exchanged, it must be checkedfor the correct software version. With the function PCB Software Update, the following pcbs are checkedfor a valid software version and updated if necessary:

- TCU (all TCUs in the system)- RDC- Analog Interface (if connected)- COM Expander (if connected)

It must be ensured that the mains switches of all other electronics units are switched off before the check/update is started.

To start the check/update, the OK button must be clicked. The system will reboot when the update hasbeen finished.

5.12.1.7 RKE Software Update

By means of this function, it is possible to update the software of the Remote Keyboard Electronics unit(KBC pcb GE3048G200 with software version A or newer. For the determination of the software version,see Section 5.10.2). The instructions on the screen must be followed.

Insert the update diskette and click on OK to start the update or click on Cancel to exit the updateroutine. If the update is started, every connected Remote Keyboard Electronics is checked for the currentsoftware version. An update is performed only, if necessary.

NOTE:The update lasts about 8 minutes for the master Remote Keyboard Electronics unit. After the master hasbeen updated, the slaves are updated automatically. The update for each slave takes about 35 s. It isdefinitely advisable not to use any Operating Unit in the system during the update. If the system is oper-ated by means of the Operating Units during the update, it may happen that the update of the RemoteKeyboard Electronics currently being updated is restarted.

In case of any failure during the update, the message Software Update failed at RKE=x will bedisplayed and the update must be repeated.

The Display Electronics Unit must be restarted after the successful software update. The correct softwareupdate can be checked by means of the Telemonitoring Data menu.

5.12.1.8 RKE Settings

This menu appears only, if an RKE is connected.

By means of the RKE (Remote Keyboard Electronics) settings, the type of monitor connected can bedefined. This is necessary for the monitor driver settings (important for ECDIS) and the OSD monitoradjustments (function Monitor Adjust) which can be performed also at the slave Operating Unit.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

144

All RKEs of the system can be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit. The RKE to be parame-terized must be selected from the Selected RKE listbox. The RKE which is connected directly to theoperated electronics unit, usually the master, is marked by means of a "*".

The display window below the listbox shows the number and the status of the selected RKE.



5.12 Service Menu

The type of monitor can be selected by means of the Monitor Type (Control Protocol) listbox. If theparameter Other types (Use RKE DIP Switch) is selected, the settings of the DIP switch on the RKEpcb are valid. Any other setting (including the setting None) of the listbox overwrites the setting of theDIP switch. For further information on the DIP switch, see the technical manual of the Remote KeyboardElectronics.

NOTE:In master/slave installations, the RKE of the master must be configured with None and the DIP switchmust be set to "no monitor", because the serial interface of the monitor is usually connected to the DisplayElectronics Unit and not to the RKE. See also the parameter Monitor Control Interface.

5.12.1.9 Start Program (Diskette)

Starts maintenance/service programs from a diskette if available.

5.12.2 Transceiver

The Transceiver Adjust settings replace many adjustments which can also be performed by means ofthe potentiometers on the Modulator or TCU boards.

5.12.2.1 Setting-to-Work

> HeadmarkerDisplay field: Antenna SpeedInput field: Headmarker correction angle ±180°

The headmarker of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted in 0.1° steps by means of the↑↓ buttons. To store the values, click Save. The headmarker cannot be adjusted mechanically. Itcan be adjusted in the complete range (±180°) by software. Adjust the headmarker by modifying the value in the input field. A target at a distance of 2...4 NMmust appear on the PPI with the same azimuth as detected visually. The headmarker adjustmentmust be performed with the Scanner in both speeds if available (dual speed Antenna Unit isoptional).

> Trigger DelayDisplay field: No information availableInput field: Value for the Trigger Delay 0...150

The trigger delay of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted by means of the ↑↓ buttons.To store the values, click Save. The trigger delay performs the correction of the range error. Adjustthe trigger delay by modifying the value in the input field. Targets at a known distance must bedisplayed with the correct distance on the PPI. If no targets are available, straight lines near the shipmust be displayed correctly.

> STC DelayDisplay field: Range, Status

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

145

Input field: STC Delay

The STC delay adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and12 NM. The radar must be switched on and the SEA indicator must be set to 0%. Adjust the STCdelay so that the main bang largely disappears but the video starts immediately after the main bang.



5.12 Service Menu

If the main bang is too large, the antenna matching and the RF installation must be checked, andcorrected if necessary.

> Video MBSDisplay field: Range, StatusInput fields: MBS Amplitude, MBS Delay

Before the Video MBS adjustment is started, the trigger delay and STC delay adjustments must havebeen performed. The main bang should be mostly suppressed by the STC adjustment. If the mainbang is still visible, it can be suppressed with the Video MBS adjust.

The video MBS adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and12 NM. Set SEA to 100% and adjust the centre area without loss of targets.

> PMA DisplayDisplay field: No information availableInput fields: PMA Display Start and PMA Display End

Defines the sector for the measurement of the Performance Monitor Amplitude. The default valuesare 270°...90°. These values depend on the alignment of the Gearbox. The sector should be definedas 180° wide. It must start with the azimuth value 90° before the azimuth of the beam when it liesat right angles over the plastic window in the outer surface of the Gearbox. The window covers themicrowave detector diode. The sector must end 90° behind the beam azimuth.

Fig. 5-17 PMA Display

ztr1

_172

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

146



5.12 Service Menu

> PM AdjustBefore the PM settings are made, it is necessary to adjust the performance monitor oscillator. TheTCU allows the adjustment by means of the input field PM Tuning as described below.

Display field No information available Input field: PM Tuning buttons for PMV Adj and PMA Adj

1. Performance Monitor Oscillator- Select the 24 NM range.- Switch AFC OFF!- Tune the video display to the maximum.- Switch the performance monitor on.- Generate a strong noise by means of GAIN.- Adjust the PM signal by means of alternating adjustment of PM Tuning and reduction of

GAIN (reduce the brightness of the inner circle by means of GAIN until it is only faintlyvisible and tune it to maximum brightness by means of PM Tuning; repeat as long as thecircle can be made visible by means of PM Tuning).

2. Start the measurement of the performance monitor video level by clicking on PMV Adj.3. Performance Monitor Amplitude:

- If possible, switch off all other radars.- Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.

Fig. 5-18 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle)

PMA (16 NM)

PMV (6 NM)

ztr1

_025

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

147



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation)

> MagnetronNote:If the Modulator has been changed, a temporarysetting for the magnetron current must beperformed as soon as the radar is switched onagain. Follow the instructions for the exchange ofthe Modulator in the technical manual of the Gear-boxes/Transceivers.

Note:Before an adjustment or a check of the magnetroncurrent, the Transceiver should have been workingfor about 20 mins in the 12 NM range.

Adjustment:

The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected,the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start theadjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment isshown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button.

Usually, it is not necessary and definitely not advisable to modify the values of Imag1, Imag2and Pulse Length Control manually when the automatic adjustment has been performed. Allranges should be checked. Only when in ranges ≤1.5 NM the value of Actual Current is below5 A and/or the display of the targets is not satisfactory, can the pulse length be increased care-fully step by step. If the value of Actual Current is higher than 11 A in the 0.75 NM and 1.5 NMrange, the pulse length can be decreased. Manual modifications must be saved.

Note:For short pulse lengths (ranges ≤1.5 NM), a deviation of ±30% between actual and nominal magne-tron current is tolerable. A deviation of -60%...+30% is tolerable in ranges of ≤3.0 NM.

CAUTIONCheck the magnetron current (Actual) while modifying Imag1 manually.The "Actual" value should not exceed the "Nominal" value.

The values of the heating voltage and the bias are shown for information only. The displayed heating

ztr1

_653

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

148

voltage is different from the voltage which can be measured at the Modulator. See the description of theModulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for information in detail.



5.12 Service Menu

> Tuning OffsetDisplay field No information availableInput field: Tuning Offset

To adjust the tuning offset, switch the radar on andselect the 12 NM range. Set the operator’s Tuningindicator on the display to 50%.By modifying the tuning offset value in the input field,the tuning indication bar must be adjusted to maximum length.

Tuning Indication GainIf modifications of the tuning adjustment causes only small deflections of the tuning indicator, it mightbe difficult to find the maximum adjustment. In this case it is possible to increase the deflections bymeans of a higher gain.The following values proved to be practical:Range 0.75 NM = 3, range 1.5 NM = 1.5, ranges 3, 6, 12 NM = 1.0Default value is 1.0.

> STC CompensationThis parameter is visible only, if the parameter Video Anti Clutter Sea is set to off.Input fields: Amplitude, Length

To adjust the STC Compensation, select the 12 NM range. Set SEA to maximum and adjust GAINin a way that the noise is clearly visible.

The default settings are:Amplitude: 30Length (X-Band): 60Length (S-Band): 40

Check that, at the end of the STC-affected area, neither a noise ring nor a dark ring appears. Ifnecessary, correct by means of Length.

5.12.2.3 Magnetron Hours

The function Magnetron Hours shows the working hours of the magnetron. The counter can be reset bymeans of the Reset button.

5.12.2.4 Antenna Information

The function Antenna Info shows information about the rotary frequency of the Scanner. It displays thestatus of the radar, the existing speed and pulse count of the Scanner, and the minimum and maximumpulse counts.

ztr1_165.cdr

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

149



5.12 Service Menu

5.12.3 Interswitch

By means of the button Input Adjust On/Offthe Interswitch (PCI) can be switched to theservice mode for the adjustment of the TVAinputs. This function can be used only if anInterswitch has been configured in thesystem layout. If no Interswitch is available,the message Not configured appears in thedata field.

If the Interswitch has been switched to theservice mode, a corresponding warningmessage appears on all Indicators. For theadjustments of the Interswitch, see the Inter-switch service manual.

5.12.4 NACOS


The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT electronicsunit and in the IDE memory module. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parametersfrom the TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and a small dialogue box is opened next to the PPI.

For the TRACKILOT, the parameters are split up into the groups UserParameters, System Parameters and Special Parameters. By means ofthe check box Trial Run, a trial program is started which helps to determinethe controller coefficients.

The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can beperformed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. Duringsetting-to-work, the settings should be performed in the Configure menus.During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menusand every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue boxaffects the TRACKPILOT immediately and so these menus should be usedduring trials.For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTER-FACE), see the technical manual of the TRACKPILOT.

Interswitch menu

ztr1

_145

.gif

TRACKPILOT service menu

ztr1

_189

.cdr

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

150



5.13 Commissioning Data Menu


NOTE:It is advisable to parameterize the entire system always at one and the same Display Electronics Unitand to transfer the parameters to the other Display Electronics Units subsequently. In this way, it ispossible to prevent an incomplete set of parameters from being transferred to a Display Electronics Unitwith an complete set of parameters, which is then overwritten.

Config Transfer

It is possible to store parameters which have been entered on one Indicator to a second Indicator (or toall Indicators) without the use of diskettes. In this way, it is possible to parameterize all radars of a systemat one Indicator. By means of the function Transmit, the parameters can be transferred to the selectedIndicator via CAN bus (or stored on a diskette). By means of the function Receive, it is possible to loadthe parameters from a selected Indicator (or to load them from a diskette).

The function Transmit writes the filesR10k.sam (configuration file),R10kcom.rep (commissioning report),version.txt (list of versions; only if abackup onto a floppy disk isperformed) and errorhist.txt (list oferrors; only if a backup onto a floppydisk is performed) onto a diskette orstores it to the selected Indicator. Byclicking on Transfer, the backup of thefiles starts.

If the files version.txt and/orerrorhist.txt have not been generatedso far, this is performed automaticallywhen the transfer is started.

Existing files on a diskette are over-written (a warning will appear). Whenchanges in the configuration havebeen performed, the parametersshould be saved on the "ConfigurationBackup" diskettes.

NOTE:If the configuration file R10k.sam has been sent to another Indicator,it does not automatically replace the existing configuration of theIndicator. A warning appears at that Indicator. This warning cannot

be acknowledged. The Indicator must be restarted to take over the new configuration and to acknowledgethe warning.

Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Transfer

ztr1

_146

.gif

ztr1_141.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

151




The function Receive loads the config-uration files from the selected Indicatoror from the diskette to the operatedIndicator. Ensure that these parame-ters are valid. Click on Transfer tostart the restorage of the files.

The parameters are not taken overautomatically. The warning New Indi-cator Config File appears. Thiswarning cannot be acknowledged. Totake over the parameters and toacknowledge the warning, the Indicatormust be restarted.

If a TRACKPILOT is connected, the R10k.sam file can be transferred also to the TRACKPILOT (but notreceived from the TRACKPILOT). The file contains the parameters for the conning display. TheR10k.sam file is also transferred to the TRACKPILOT, when "All Indicators" has been selected. Theparameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE itself cannot be transferred by means of theConfig Transfer function. This must be performed by means of the Configuration menus.

Service Report

It is important to note what work hasbeen done at what time. The servicereport has to be filled in after each itemof repair or maintenance work. Click onService Report to view the servicereports which have been filled in so far.

Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Receive

ztr1

_148

.gif

Commissioning Data menu

ztr1

_147

.gif

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

152



5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings


The following instructions are valid for the motherboard DFI CA64. If different motherboards are used, thissection will be extended.

NOTE:To perform the BIOS settings, a PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector must be connected at the DisplayElectronics Unit instead of the Radar Keyboard.

5.14.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu

It is necessary to connect a PC keyboard witha PS/2 connector to the motherboard. Other-wise it is not possible to operate the BIOSSetup menu.

The keyboard must be connected by means ofthe PS/2 connector in the same way as theRadar Keyboard (see Section 4.5.3 on page 49or Section 4.5.9 on page 64).If the radar is equipped with a Radar Keyboard,this must be disconnected beforehand.

1. Connect the keyboard as described above.

2. The motherboard has a soft power switch. This switch is enabled in the BIOS settings of a newboard or a board which is configured with the default settings (e.g. after battery exchange). In thiscase, close ATX-SW (DFI CA61/CB61/CA64) by means of a jumper, switch on the Display Elec-tronics Unit by means of the monitor power switch and remove the jumper. With the BIOS settingsdescribed below, the soft power switch will be disabled and from then on, the system can be startedwithout the jumper. If the system starts without the use of the jumper, the BIOS is not configuredwith the default settings.

3. While the system is starting up, press Del until the BIOS Setup menu appears.

NOTE:The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started by means of the monitor power switch. If theBIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start when the monitor is switched on.

5.14.2 Procedure

To set the correct parameters, first load the default settings and then modify only the parameters whichare different from the default settings.

In the following description, only the parameters which have to be modified are mentioned. All otherparameters must be left at their default values.

Fig. 5-19 Soft power switch of the motherboard

ztr1

_173

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

153

5.14.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus

The operation of the BIOS Setup menus is described by means of the help function of the software and/or help texts which are displayed on the screen, depending on the selected submenu or parameter. Theoperation of the BIOS Setup menus might be different for the various motherboards.




For the navigation in the menus, the keys PgUp, PgDn, the cursor keys and the Enter key must be used.

Some entries must be confirmed by means of the Y key. If the keyboard which is used for the parame-terization is not a US version, it might be possible that the Y key is not at the correct position. In thiscase, the button has to be used which is at the position of the Y key on a standard US PC keyboard.

After the values have been modified, the modifications must be saved before the BIOS Setup menus areexited. The system is then rebooted automatically.

5.14.4 Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64

Loading the Default Settings

Select LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS with the cursor keys and confirm.

All parameters are now set to the default values. The parameters which have to be set differently fromthe default values are described in the following tables.

Parameters which have to be set differently from the Default Settings

First set the current time and date (UTC). Then modify the following parameters in the submenus:

BIOS Settings for DFI CA64

Submenu Parameter Setting

STANDARD CMOS FEATURES Drive A 1.44M, 3.25 in

Halt On All, But Disk/Key

ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES Virus Warning Disabled 1)

1)

Quick Power On Self Test Enabled 1)

First Boot Device SCSI

Second Boot Device RADAR/CHARTRADAR: FloppyMULTIPILOT: CDROM

Third Boot Device HDD-0

Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled 1)

ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES OnChip USB Disabled

INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS IDE Primary Prefetch Disabled

OnChip Sound 2) Disable

Onboard Legacy Audio 2) Disable

Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4

Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3

POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP PWR Lost Resume State Turn On

PNP/PCI CONFIGURATION Resources controlled by Auto (ESCD)

Assign IRQ for USB Disabled

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

154

Is the default setting, please check2) For motherboards with sound option only



5.15 Upgrade Kits

5.15 Upgrade Kits

Switch off the power supply to the system before starting the installation process!

5.15.1 Analog Interface Kit

The Analog Interface kit consists of the following components:

- Analog Interface pcb (HS10-SIR10T)- Mains cable to the Interconnection Board- Data cable to the Interconnection Board- 4 screws M3x6

To install the Analog Interface, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. Ensure, that the gyro is switchedoff! The gyro power supply is independent of the radar power supply. The pcb must be installed in theInterconnection Box.

The installation steps are as follows:

1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open theInterconnection Box.

2. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided next to the Interconnection Board.3. Connect the power supply cable to J7 of the Interconnection Box and to TB50 (N), TB51 (L1) and

TB52 (PE) of the Analog Interface pcb. See Section 4.5.10 on page 68 for a description of theAnalog Interface and its terminals.

4. Remove the four jumpers from J5 of the Interconnection Board and connect the data cable to J5 ofthe Interconnection Board and to J7 of the Analog Interface.

5. Connect the gyro or log.6. Close the housing.7. Start the system and set the parameters for the Analog Interface by means of the System Mainte-

nance Manager. See Section 5.6 from page 98 on for information about the System MaintenanceManager.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

155



5.15 Upgrade Kits

5.15.2 RGB Buffer Kit

The RGB Buffer kit consists of the following components:

- RGB Buffer pcb- Flat cable to the Interconnection Board- Monitor cable to the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP) in the Display Electronics Unit- 4 screws M3x30- 4 threaded bolts

To install the RGB Buffer, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Inter-connection Box.

The installation steps are as follows:

1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open theInterconnection Box.

2. Insert the threaded bolts to replace the four screws from the holes shown in Figure 4-17 on page 65.3. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided, as shown on page 64.4. Connect the flat cable to J6 of the Interconnection Board and to J1 of the RGB Buffer pcb. See

Section 4.5.13 for a description of the RGB Buffer and its terminals.5. Connect the monitor cable to J2 of the RGB Buffer and to the VGA connector of the GVP unit in the

Display Electronics Unit.6. Close the housing.7. Connect the monitor to J3 and the slave monitor to J4 of the RGB Buffer.8. Check the DIP switches for correct 75 Ω termination (usually a termination is not necessary, because

the monitor itself is terminated).9. Start the system. Further software settings are not necessary.

If more than three monitors are needed, the 5 Channel Video Switch SH3023 must be used.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

156

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e


6 Setting-To-Work Guide

6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components


The following instructions will guide you through the first setting-to-work of a RADARPILOT/CHAR-TRADAR 1100 or the radar components of a MULTIPILOT 1100. The workflow description below doesnot contain all necessary information for the setting-to-work but it shows the correct sequence of allsettings and adjustments and it gives cross references to the relevant sections in this manual where youcan find information in detail. Settings and adjustments which must be performed by means of the SystemMaintenance Manager software are described by means of help texts which appear after a few secondswhen the cursor is placed over a button or which can be called by means of the button.

Section 6.2, E x a m p l e o f t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a D u a l I n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a C H A R T P I L O T , shows the mostimportant configuration parameter settings of a dual installation in detail.


1. Cabling and Installation

The mechanical installation and the cabling of a radar system must be planned by means of the manu-facturer’s outline drawings and cabling documents. It is not possible to carry out the installation in areasonable way without such preparations. The cabling documents describe most of the possibleversions of the system installation. It is advisable to read the general remarks and the remarks printedon the plans. The outline drawings also contain drawings of components which may not be included inthe delivery of your system. The installation and cabling work must be performed by competent persons.

2. Preparations

The following checks and settings must be performed before the mains supply to the system is switchedon:

- Check whether the mains selector switches are set correctly (Interconnection Board,mains input unit of the Transceiver).

- Check whether the power supply for the Antenna Unit has been connected correctly.

- Set the Transceiver No. on the TCU pcb by means of the DIP switch 1. See DIP switch 1description in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. For a single installa-tion, set the Transceiver No. to "1".

- Set the indicator No. on the RDC pcb by means of the DIP switch. See the DIP switchdescription on page 53. For a single installation, set the indicator No. to "1". The indicatorNo. and transceiver No. of one and the same radar must be identical.

- The correct jumper settings for the X-/S-Band version and the transmitter power should beset ex works.

3. CAN Bus Termination

For further information, see Section 4.3 on page 42. The radar may work without termination but itis highly advisable to install the termination to guarantee undisturbed functioning in all environ-mental conditions.

4. Ethernet Network Termination

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

157

If the system has an Ethernet network, the cabling must be performed in accordance with the advicein Section 4.5.8 on page 62.

Now switch on the power to the system.

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




5. System Layout and Configuration of Subsystems

The system layout of the entire system must be defined by means of the System MaintenanceManager. The parameterization and subsequent modifications should be performed always at oneand the same Indicator. See Section 5.11 on page 112 for general hints about the menu handling proce-dure, and, see Section 5.11.5 on page 114 for further information about entering the system layout.

If the system layout has been entered, only the relevant subsystems remain in the menu tree and haveto be configured:

- IndicatorConfigure each available Indicator (e.g. type of monitor/keyboard) by means of theAdministration menus. See the hints in Section 5.11.6.

- TransceiverConfigure each Transceiver by loading the factory-defined parameters from the availableTCUs. This is the precondition for the transceiver adjustment (see 6, T r a n s c e i v e r A d j u s t -m e n t s ). Do not press the Save button! Otherwise the invalid default parameters of theRDC will overwrite the parameters of the TCU which have been preset ex works.Only the following parameters have to be set in the transceiver configuration menu:- Antenna Position- Frequency Deviation (if necessary)- Blanking Sector (if requested)- Speed Capability single/double- Antenna Motor Frequency

- Configure the system’s interfaces for the ship’s sensors. Depending on the interface type,use the menu item Serial Interfaces of the relevant Indicator, and/or Sensor Interfaces.For further information, see Section 5.11.8 on page 127.

- Configure all ship-specific data, especially the system position in the menu System/ShipParameters > Ship Data.

6. Transceiver Adjustments

Use the Service menu to perform the transceiver adjustments. See Section 5.12.2 from page 145on for further information. All adjustments of the Setting-to-Work menu have to be performed.Every adjustment must be stored by means of the Save button. The parameters are stored in theIDE memory module and in the TCU. Before the performance monitor adjustments can beperformed, the RDC pcb must be adjusted.

7. Indicator Adjustments (RDC)

- RDC adjustments (ADC threshold adjustments) as described in Section 5.12.1.2 on page140. The adjustment must be performed at every single Indicator for all Transceivers.

8. Backup

The parameter settings must be stored on diskettes in duplicate. One copy should stay on the ship(it can be stored in the technical manual) and one copy must be sent to the manufacturer.

Use the Commissioning Data menu (Config Transfer) to generate the backup. For further infor-mation, see Section 5.13 from page 151 onwards.

9. Dual or Multiple Installations

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

158

All Indicators and Transceivers must be configured at one Indicator. It is possible to load and store theparameters directly from one Indicator to another via CAN-Bus (without use of a backup diskette). Thiscan be performed by means of the function Commissioning Data > Config Transfer of the SystemMaintenance Manager. See Section 5.13 on page 151 for further information.

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




NOTE:To avoid the mistakes which may be caused by originating different parameter settings from differentDisplay Electronics Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Elec-tronics Unit.

All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function afterwards to the other radars.

Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

159

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide



6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT


This example contains the most important parameters for a typical dual installation.

6.2.1 System Diagram

WP 1

WP 2

WP 3



InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

InterconnectionBox

Ship's Sensors - Indicator 1 Ship's Sensors - Indicator 2

CHARTPILOT

Indicator 1

GEARBOX withTRANSCEIVER 2(X-Band, 8 ft)

GEARBOX withTRANSCEIVER 2(X-Band, 8 ft)

GEARBOX withTRANSCEIVER 1(S-Band)

GEARBOX withTRANSCEIVER 1(S-Band)

Indicator 2

AISElectronics Unit

AISElectronics Unit

Radar Scan ConverterRadar Scan Converter

ARPA Electronics

CAN BusInterconnection




1234

1234

EthernetSensor InputS1S2

Sensor InputS1S2

Ethernet Module

Ethernet InterconnectionEthernet Interconnection Ethernet Interconnection

Radar Data Converter

Serial InterfaceInterconnectionSerial InterfaceInterconnection

Serial InterfaceInterconnectionSerial InterfaceInterconnection



Radar Scan ConverterRadar Scan Converter

ARPA Electronics

Ethernet Module

Radar Data Converter

CAN 0, Radar bus

LAN

TVA1 out

TVA1 out

LAN

CAN 1, Nav bus

Gyro Output 1 Gyro Output 2Position 1 Position 2Log Echograph 4630

S A MS A M

ztr1

_190

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

160

Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example)

Wind

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




6.2.2 System Layout Menu

Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation

Sensor Interface 2

Configure System Layout

Indicator Indicator 1 RADARPILOT 1100

Indicator 2 RADARPILOT 1100

Indicator 3 Not Connected



Transceiver Transceiver 1 Connected

Transceiver 2 Connected

Transceiver 3 Not Connected



Interswitch Not Connected

Sensor Interfaces Not ConnectedSensor Interface 1

Not Connected

NACOS Configuration TRACKPILOT Not Connected

ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDP.) Not Connected

Planning System Connected Planning System 1

AIS Connected to LAN

VDR Not connected

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

161

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




6.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters)

On/Off

Gyro against Magnetic CompassGyro against COG of Main Position SensorGyro against COG of Redun-dant Position SensorIgnore Gyro against COG above ROT of:Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of:Full sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of:

Position against Redundant Position Sensor

On/Off

Speed against Redundant Speed SensorSpeed against SOG of Main Position SensorSpeed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor

ARPA Lost Target w.o. Al.

AIS Lost Target w.o. Al.

TB2 Term 15,16, HM turn

Configure System / Ship Parameters

Administration

Vessel

Call Sign

Shipping Company

Flag

Phone

Mustermann

MS Test

German

DACF

0087X1120079

Fax 0087X1120080

System Position and other Ship Dimensions 2)

Distance to Bow

Distance to P

Distance to Stern

Distance to SB120

10

8

8

Nominal Speed 20.0

Acceleration 0.020

Ship Data

Video Anti Clutter Sea

Basic Radaron

Startup Sensor Selection Heading Heading Sensor 1

Speed Log 1 3)

Position Position Sensor 1

Time Position Sensor 1

Time from selected Position Sensor Yes

IMO Number

MMSI Number 1)

Type of Ship

XXX XXX XXX

XXXX XXX

Passenger Vessel

Type of Ship coded as No. 69

Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 200°/min

Position Quality Check Off

Minimum Radius 0.4 NM

Maximum Radius 3.0 NM

Gyro Monitoring

Speed Monitoring

Position Monitoring

Off

On/Off Off19.5 NM

16.0 NM

Not Connected

Off

Length at Waterline 122

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

162

Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation

Differentiated Heading Selected Heading Sensor

Default Depth Depth Sensor 1

Default Wind Wind Sensor 1

Default Weather Manual Weather

1) Must be entered for AIS!2) See Figure 6-4 on page 163.3) BSH does not allow GPS as speed sensor.

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




Fig. 6-4 System Position

- Transversal +

- Lon

gitu

dina

l +

LT

P1 P2

RX

RS

LT = Log Transducer, defines the System Position10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB

RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m DistanceLongitudinal to System Position

P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m DistanceLongitudinal to System Position

PAIS = AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m DistanceLongitudinal to System Position

-4 m

8 m8 m

-82

m-8

0m

-85

m

-110

m

10m

4 m

PAIS

120

m

-2 m

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

163

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




6.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator)

Administration

Indicator 1

Monitor Aspect Ratio

Configure Radar

Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3068)

Keyboard RADAR Keyboard

Name Indicator 1

Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec

Indicator

System Fault Alarm Disable

Dangerous Target Alarm Disable

Lost Target Alarm Disable

Guard Zone Alarm Disable

Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes

CHARTRADAR Function Not Available

CHARTRADAR Identification Code XXXXXXXXX

CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX

Conning Not Available

Based on Specification IEC 60936-1

Radar PPI Radius Use Default

Use Default

Head-Up PPI Orientation Bow-up (standard)

Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)

Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP Yes

Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled

Double End Ferry No

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

164

Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




Serial Output used as

Serial I/O 1

Driver

Weather

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)

Baud Rate 38400

Serial Gyro Connected

Position Not Connected

Serial Interfaces

Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1

Display Selected Gyro NoSpeed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected

Not Connected

Transfer RTE/WPL OFFNot defined

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

165


6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide





Serial I/O 2

Driver

Weather

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)

Baud Rate 4800

Serial Gyro Not Connected


Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected

Not Connected

Transfer RTE/WPL OFFAIS Navigation Data

Use Time from Position Senor

Channel Position Sensor 1

Distance Longitudinal - 85

Distance Transversal - 4

Sensor Number 1

GLL, GGA Selection Pos. from GLL Message

Use Speed from Position Sensor Yes 1)

Yes

1) Set to No for DNV/BSH ships

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

166


6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)

Baud Rate 4800



Serial I/O 3

Speed Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected

Weather Not Connected

Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Transfer RTE/WPL OFF

Serial Output used as Not defined


Baud Rate 4800



Serial I/O 4

Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Depth Not Connected

Wind Connected


Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Channel Log 1

Distance Longitudinal 0

Distance Transversal 0

Log Type 1 Axis Log

Longit. Speed Filter Const. 1

Transversal Speed Const. 1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

167




6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




Head-Up Display Orientation

Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3068)

Keyboard RADAR Keyboard

Name Indicator 2

Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec

Administration

System Fault Alarm Disable

Dangerous Target Alarm Disable

Lost Target Alarm Disable

Guard Zone Alarm Disable

Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes

Serial Interfaces

Indicator 2

CHARTRADAR Function Not Available

CHARTRADAR Identification Code XXXXXXXXX

CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX

Conning Not Available

Based on Specification IEC 60936-1

Radar PPI Radius Use Default

Monitor Aspect Ratio Use Default

Bow-up (standard)

Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)

Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP Yes

Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled

Double End Ferry No

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

168


6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




Serial I/O 1


Baud Rate 38400

Serial Gyro Connected


Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected



Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Transfer RTE/WPL OFFNot defined

Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1

Display Selected Gyro No

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

169


6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide





Serial I/O 2

Driver

Weather

NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)

Baud Rate 4800


Position Connected

Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected

Not Connected

Transfer RTE/WPL OFFAIS Navigation Data

Channel Position Sensor 2

Distance Longitudinal - 85

Distance Transversal + 4

Sensor Number 2

GLL, GGA Selection Pos from GLL message

Use Speed from Position Sensor Yes 1)

Use Time from Position Senor Yes

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

170


1) Set to No for DNV/BSH ships

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e





Baud Rate 4800



Serial I/O 3

Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Depth Connected

Wind Not Connected


Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF




Baud Rate 4800



Serial I/O 4

Speed Not Connected

Time Not Connected

Output

Depth Not Connected

Wind Not Connected


Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF

Transfer VTG OFF

Transfer HDT OFF

Transfer TTM OFF

Transfer OSD OFF

Transfer MWV OFF

Transfer ZDA OFF

Transfer DBT OFF

Transfer ROT OFF

Transfer MWD OFF

Transfer VBW OFF

Transfer MHU OFF

Transfer MMB OFF

Transfer MTA OFF



Depth Value Below Transducer

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

171


6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




6.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver)

Configure Radar Transceiver

Type of Generation RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW

Frequency Deviation 0

Sector Blanking 1

Antenna

Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX

Transceiver 2

Number of Blanking Sectors

Speed Capability

Distance Longitudinal

Distance Transversal

Beam WidthAzimuth Pulses per Revolution

Antenna Motor Frequency

Type of Generation RADAR 1100 S-Band

Frequency Deviation 0

Sector Blanking

Antenna

Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX

Transceiver 1

Number of Blanking Sectors

Speed Capability

Distance Longitudinal

Distance Transversal

Beam WidthAzimuth Pulses per Revolution

Antenna Motor Frequency

Single

- 82

0

1.0 (8 ft Antenna)

1920

60 Hz

None

Single (Low Speed)

- 80

0

1.8

415

60 Hz

Additional Information Main Mast

Additional Information Main Mast

None

Height above Sea Level 28

Height above Sea Level 25

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

172

Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




6.2.6 Configure (AIS)

Fig. 6-14 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation

6.2.7 Configure (Planning System)

Fig. 6-15 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation

Configure AISAIS Channel AIS Sensor 1

Distance of GPS Antenna Longi-tudinal (see Figure 6-4)

Distance of GPS Antenna Trans-versal (see Figure 6-4)

-110 m

-2 m

AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1

IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud


IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud


Not connected

Configure Planning SystemSelect Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA Targets

Indicator 1

Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT

True

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

173

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide



6.3 Important Hardware Components


6.3.1 COM Expander GE3044G210

ztr1

_624

.jpg

12345

Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3

Plug

-in p

cb 4

1

11

Plug-in pcb 5

F1

11

TP12

TP11

TP21

S118 1

DS1 DS2 DS3

DS4 DS5 DS6

18

ONS1

1

1

TP22

ON

J7 Function 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board4 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board5/6 5 connected to 67/8 7 connected to 8


TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22Manufacturer’s use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers, do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.

TP41 Function Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2)

TP42 Function Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocoupler driver input)Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4)

TB6 Function 1 Digital input 1 (+)2 Digital input 1 (-)3 Digital input 2 (+)4 Digital input 2 (-)

TB7 Function 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)2 Alarm out 1 centre3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed)4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)5 Alarm out 2 centre (not used)6 Alarm out 2 break (not used)The relays are switched on if the pcb is working!

TB8 Mains supply1 PE2 N3 L1

TB1

12345

TB2

12345

TB3

12345

TB4

12345

TB5

1234

TB6

12345

TB7

6

1

3TB8 2

TP13

TB1...5 FunctionSensor interface,with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G2181 RxD +2 RxD -3 TxD +4 TxD -5 GNDFor all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1.

S1 Function1 OFF = COM Expander 1

ON = COM Expander 22 Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)3...7 No function (default = OFF)8 Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)

DS1...6 Function DS1 green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not usedDS2 green : UART2 working, red: UART2 error, off: interface not usedDS3 green : UART3 working, red: UART3 error, off: interface not usedDS4 green : UART4 working, red: UART4 error, off: interface not usedDS5 green : UART5 working, red: UART5 error, off: interface not used

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

174

Fig. 6-16 COM Expander pcb

DS6 red flashing at 0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




6.3.2 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

ztr1

_623

.jpg

1

1 1 1 1 1 18

DS4 DS8S1

1

E15 E20 E2 TP151TP152TP161

TP162

1 1

1 1

E10/E11

E1 E4 1

1E14

1E16

1

E17

1

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

J4

E28

Termination ofTP103 Serial interface 4TP102 Serial interface 3

E12

E5 E3, ext. reset contact

J2

DS5 DS7DS6 DS8

DS9DS10

DS1DS2

DS3 DS11DS12

DS13

E25

E26

E27

1) See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.

DIP Switch S1/5...8

Function

ON OFF

5Boot from IDE memory module (default)

Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is started while booting).

6 Monitor resolution 1024x768

Monitor resolution 1280x1024

7 Monitor frequency 72 Hz Monitor frequency 60 Hz

8 Normal operation (default) Service mode on 1)

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi-cator NumberOn=closed=0; off=open=1

Switch No.

4 3 2 1

Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On

Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off

Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On

Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off

Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On

All other settings are not admissible

Settings for the different Monitor Types

Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7

AZ3069G040 Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off

AZ3063G04x/5x Off Off AZ3056G04x Off Off

AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off

AZ3065G040 Off Off

CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2

TP162 1/2

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus termi-natedNo jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not terminatedSee also Section 4.3 on page 42.

E19

E18

Motherboard

1.jp

g

Speaker

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

175

Fig. 6-17 RDC pcb

TP101 Serial interface 2TP100 Serial interface 1

E5/2

ztr1

_01

E5/1

E20/1

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




6.3.3 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207

For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.

Fig. 6-18 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03

ztr1

_080

.jpg


TB1TB2TB3TB4TB5TB6TB7TB8

TB52, PETB51, NTB50, L1

TP5 TP1 TP74 TP90 TP70TP75

1

1 1

1 1

11

1

F1

TP2J7DS7DS37

DS35DS33

DS34DS36

TB Function 25 Common (stepper)24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common

(synchro)23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro)22 Gyro T21 Gyro S20 Gyro R


TB30TB31TB32TB33

TB Function 40 Alarm out 1, make41 Alarm out 1, centre42 Alarm out 1, break43 Alarm out 2, make44 Alarm out 2, centre45 Alarm out 2, break

TB Function 30 ST1 status input for gyro31 ST1 status input for gyro32 ST2 status input for log33 ST2 status input for log

TB Function 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts)2 Log BT (Bottom Track)3 Log WT (Water Track)4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))6 Log VX (speed)7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift))8 Log GND

1


1 7

TB44

TB10TB11TB12TB13TB14TB15TB16

TB Function 10 AIS RxD, Input -11 AIS RxD, Input +12 Do not connect!13 Do not connect!14 AIS TxD, Output -15 AIS TxD Output +16 AIS GND(≥Rev 03 only)

J1 RS422 InterfaceConnector for SH3014G203, RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)

TP99 AddressesSet jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also a second Analog Interface is installed)


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

176

6 S

etti

ng

-To

-Wo

rk G

uid

e




Connection of Log and Gyro

Fig. 6-19 Connection of log and gyro

RSTcommon

DC stepper system







( common - high )

+ ( - )

Gyro

AC System 50 HzAC System 60 Hz

Gyro (Synchro)

Parameter = “DC Stepper Positive”Analog Gyro SystemParameter = “DC Stepper Positive”Analog Gyro System

Parameter DC Stepper NegativeAnalog Gyro System = “ ”Parameter DC Stepper NegativeAnalog Gyro System = “ ”

Parameter = “DC Stepper Negative”Analog Gyro SystemParameter = “DC Stepper Negative”Analog Gyro System

Parameter DC Stepper PositiveAnalog Gyro System = “ ”Parameter DC Stepper PositiveAnalog Gyro System = “ ”

REF 1RSTREF 2 (reference

common)REF 2 (reference

common)2422

25 25

25 25

25

22 22

22 22

22

21

21 21

21 21

21

20

20 20

20 20

20

23TB

TB TB

TB TB

TB

TB TBGND (common)

VX (speed)6

8

R R

R R

S S

S S

T T

T T

common common

common common

+ -

+ -

1.) DC Stepper System 2.) DC stepper system

3.) DC stepper system 4.) DC Stepper System

( common - ground ) ( common - ground )

( common - high ) ( common - high )

GND (common)

VX (speed)6

87

5432

VY (drift)

LOG YPM (+/-Y)LOG XPM (+/-X)WT (Water Track)BT (Bottom Track)

1-axis log connection to Radar 2-Axis Log connection to Radar

Analog Interface

Analog InterfaceAnalog Interface Analog Interface

Analog Interface Analog Interface

Analog Interface


1 Log SP

Analog InterfaceAnalog InterfaceLOG

GYRO

ztr1

_124

.eps

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

177

6 Settin

g-To

-Wo

rk Gu

ide




ztr1

_613

.jpg

TB1 Function Ship’s sensors RS42220 GND419 TXD4-18 TXD4+17 RXD4-16 RXD4+15 GND314 TXD3-13 TXD3+12 RXD3-11 RXD3+10 GND29 TXD2-8 TXD2+7 RXD2-6 RXD2+5 GND14 TXD1-3 TXD1+2 RXD1-1 RXD1+for TTL, 20 mA, RS232,RS485, see Section 4.5.9.3 on page 66.

TB2 Function19 = TB3/518 = TB3/517 = TB3/5Double End Ferry:15, 16 closed = AFT15, 16 opened = FWDAudio Alarm Ack.:14 Alarm Ack. M13 Alarm Ack. PChart Alarm:12 AL_out4 make11 AL_out4 centre10 AL_out4 breakTarget Alarm:(ARPA/AIS Alarm)9 AL_out3 make8 AL_out3 centre7 AL_out3 breakDead Man Alarm Trig:6 AL_out2 make5 AL_out2 centre4 AL_out2 breakRadar Alarm:3 AL_out1 make2 AL_out1 centre1 AL_out1 break

TB3 Function 15 24V ON/OFF ONN14 24V ON/OFF ONP13 24V ON/OFF ONN12 24V ON/OFF ONP11 CAN0_A (IN)10 CAN0_B (IN)9 CAN1_A (IN)8 CAN1_B (IN)7 CAN0_A (OUT)6 CAN0_B (OUT)5 CAN_GND4 CAN1_A (OUT)3 CAN1_B (OUT)2 24V ON/OFF ONN1 24V ON/OFF ONPIN and OUT for the CAN-Bus are identical.

TB6 Function 1 L1 to interf. expander2 N to interf. expander3 PE to interf. expander

TB5 Function 1 L1 spare2 N spare3 PE spare

TB4 FunctionShip’s mains1 L1 in2 N in3 PE in

J7 FunctionMains to Analog Interface1 L12 N3 PE

TB10 Function1 L1 out, to monitor2 N out, to monitor3 PE out, to monitor

TB11 Function1 L1 out, displ. el.2 N out, displ. el.3 PE out, displ. el.

TB13 Function1 L1 in, switched

by monitor2 N in, monitor3 PE in, monitor

TB17 Function 1/2 TVA1 out

3/4 Screen


3/4 Screen


3/4 Screen

J4 Function to El. Unit (RDC)1 TVA12 TVA23456 GND7 GND8 GND9101112131415 GND

J3 Function to El. Unit serial port1 n.c.2 COM1_RXD3 COM1_TXD4 COM1_DTR5 COM1_GND6 COM1_DSR7 COM1_RTS8 COM1_CTS9 n.c.

J2 FunctionSerial interface to monitor1 LKAP (beeper +)2 RXD3 TXD

J1 Functionto El. Unit (RDC)1 RXD1+2 RXD1-3 TXD1+4 TXD1-5 GND16 RXD2+7 RXD2-8 TXD2+9 TXD2-10 GND211 RXD3+12 RXD3-13 TXD3+14 TXD3-15 GND3

22 AL_out2 centre23 AL_out2 make24 AL_out3 break25 AL_out3 centre26 AL_out3 make27 AL_out4 break28 AL_out4 centre29 AL_out4 make30 +5 V31 TXD4+32 TXD4-33 GND434 GND35 LKAP (Beeper +)36 LKAM (Beeper -)37 CAN0_A38 CAN0_B

44 VGND145 V12M46 n.c.47 Audio Alarm

Ack. P48 Audio Alarm

Ack. N49 Alarm-ACK2 P

3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2

111

1

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

S1

J5

115 V230 V

F1

F2

F3

F5F4

K1

TB1 TB2 TB3

TP10

J4 J3 J2 J1

J6

Drillings for the RGB Buffer

FusesF1 System’s mains

fuseF2 System’s

mains fuseF3 Mains fuse monitorF4 Mains T1F5 24V ON/OFF signalSee also page 190.

J5 CAUTIONIf the Analog Interface is not connected, the following jumpers must be set to enable TB3 for the CAN bus:- J5 1/2- J5 3/4- J5 5/6- J5 7/8

T1

TB 2, Alarm ContactsThe alarm contacts are provided by the RDC. See the RDC description for technical data and configuration.

Drillings for the LAN-BNC adapter

LED FunctionDS1 is lit when mains is switched on at the monitor of this radar.DS2 is lit when the DC voltage is available from the transformer/rectifier.

1

Plug-in pcb 1

Plug-inpcb 4

DS1

DS2

TB18, J100, J8, TP10These connectors and testpins are needed for the connection of a Remote Keyboard Electronics. See the corre-sponding technical manual for further information.

J8

TP11J9

J100 11

1

Drillings for the Video Selector SH3023G205

Position of the RKE pcb,mounting by means of 4 bolts.

TB18 Function For Remote Keyboard Electronics6 CAN_KBC GND5 CAN_KBC GND4 CAN_KBC B Out ->3 CAN_KBC A Out ->2 CAN_KBC B in <-1 CAN_KBC A in <-

J91

1SB

SB = Solder BridgeThese solder bridges must be opened when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used. For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary. If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the power supply cable GE3050G020 must be used (J9). See also TP11.

SB SB

SB

J9, J91 FunctionSupply input for plug-in

TP11Jumper on 1/2 = defaultJumper on 2/3 = must be set if the power supply cable GE3050G020 is connected (plug-in pcbs)

Plug-inpcb 3

Plug-inpcb 2


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

178

Fig. 6-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216

4 DTR5 GND6 DSR7 RTS8 CTS9 LKAM (beeper -)

16 RXD4+17 RXD4-18 AL_out1 break19 AL_out1 centre20 AL_out1 make21 AL_out2 break

39 CAN1_A40 CAN1_B41 CAN_GND42 VGND243 V12R

J6Connector for theRGB Buffer. See Section 4.5.13.

pcbs1 Vcc2 GND3 Vcc4 PE

7 R

evis

ion

Ove

rvie

w


7 Revision Overview

7 Revision Overview

This table shows the differences in the functionality and the necessary prerequisites for the use of thedifferent revisions of hardware or software components. For a description in detail, see the correspondingsections in this technical manual. The following table is only an overview. If an item has to be exchanged,the same revision or a newer one must be used.

Component(hardware / soft-ware)

Extended / different functionalities Prerequisites Remarks

So far, no revi-sions/versions of hard-/software exist.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05

179

7 Revisio

n O

verview


7 Revision Overview

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05

180


8 Repair/Maintenance

8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes


GENERAL:

The jumper settings and switch settings on a replacement pcb must bethe same as on the defective pcb. The wire connections must be madein exactly the same way. Exceptions are explained in this manual.

8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes

For the BIOS configuration, it is necessary to use a PC keyboard with PS/2 connector. For the handlingof the System Maintenance Manager, it is also more convenient to work with an additional keyboard. Itmay be helpful to connect a buzzer to the motherboard of the Display Electronics Unit to recognize thesignals described in Section 8.2.4.

8.2 Trouble-Shooting

8.2.1 Hints

In case of the of problems during setting-to-work, the cabling should be checked again. All componentsmust be supplied with power.

- Read the system fault messages on the screen to get more information about the problem.- Try to perform the self-check routines as described in Section 5.9 on page 105 to localize the fault.- If no radar video is displayed, the LEDs DS11...13 of the RDC pcb indicate, whether the incoming

signal is correct.

8.2.2 System Faults

The system fault codes are displayed on the monitor together with a short description. To obtain moreinformation about the system faults and to display the existing faults, use the System MaintenanceManager with the submenu Telemonitoring Data. For the description of Telemonitoring Data, seeSection 5.10 on page 109.

The system faults of the Telemonitoring Data screen are displayed in four columns. These columns are:

- Error- Dev.- SubDev.- Info

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

181

The column "Error" shows the system fault number. The column "Dev." shows the device which iscausing the fault, and the column "SubDev." gives an indication for the defective subdevice, if possible.The column "Info" gives more detailed information about the fault. The system faults are also listed inSection 10 on page 207 in this manual. This information cannot cover all defects. It will be updated asoften as possible.




8.2.3 Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog)

The RDC has a watchdog function. If an error is detected in the electronics units’ components, a redscreen is generated. By means of the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the mother-board is reset (for the connection, see Section 4.5.4 on page 53). In case of such a reset, the systemreboots. If the reset cable is not connected or the connection is faulty, the red screen is displayed perma-nently, because the reset cannot be performed.

In case of a permanent red screen, check the reset cabling and perform the RDC watchdog test.

If the system displays the red screen and reboots occasionally or repeatedly, there is a hardware or soft-ware problem.

8.2.4 Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start

If the Display Electronics Unit does not start, check the items of the following table.

General Guidelines for Troubleshooting with the Display Electronics Unit

Symptom/Problem Remedy

The Display Electronics Unit starts only if the ATX Power On contacts are shortened (see Section 5.14).

This happens if the BIOS settings have been lost. In this case, the BIOS Setup has to be performed as described in Section 5.14.4.See the next line if this remedy has no success.

The Display Electronics Unit starts only if the ATX Power On contacts are shortened (see Section 5.14) although the BIOS setup has been performed beforehand.

The BIOS settings have not been saved after powering off and on. In this case, the backup battery on the motherboard may be discharged or the motherboard is defective.

The ATX power supply fan does not work. - 230 V mains supply is missing.- The internal fuse of the power supply (Display Electronics Unit) is

blown.- The power supply is defective.- One of the power outlets of the power supply is short-circuited.- One of the devices connected to the power supply is defective.

The CPU’s heatsink fan does not work. - The CPU’s heatsink fan is defective.- The motherboard is defective.- One of the pcb’s connected to the motherboard is defective or

connected incorrectly.- The power supply is defective.- The CPU is defective.

The buzzer sounds continuously with long beeps.

- The memory module is defective or connected incorrectly to themotherboard

The buzzer sounds a sequence of one long and three short beeps (repeatedly).

- The Graphics And Video Processor is defective or connectedincorrectly to the motherboard.

The buzzer sounds one short beep, but the monitor remains black or displays "NO SYNC"

- The connection between monitor and graphics and videoprocessor is incorrect.

- The Graphics And Video Processor is defective.

The Electronics Unit does not start. The power supply unit is equipped with a protective circuit against tottering contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, the power supply does not start and it must be switched off for 5...10 s until it can be switched on again.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

182

Before removing or inserting any component, switch off the power!

1. Check all power supply connectors.

2. Check if the pcbs are connected correctly in their sockets. If there is any doubt, remove and insertthe pcb again.




3. Insert the memory module in another socket.

4. If one or more pcb’s seem to be installed in a skew way (i.e. not vertically, or distorted) then:- Remove the pcbs.- Untighten the motherboard’s screws (so that the motherboard can be shifted).- Re-insert the pcbs and fix them by means of their screws.- Tighten the screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the pcbs.

5. Clean the pcbs’ and memory modules’ contacts, first using at first a plastic rubber and then a cottoncloth with some alcohol.

6. Remove all pcbs from the motherboard and connect a speaker to the motherboard’s speakerconnector (labelled "SPKR" or "SPEAKER").

6.1 When powering on the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds continuously with longbeeps, because the memory module is missing. If this does not happen, the motherboard mustbe exchanged.

6.2 Insert the memory module in one of the memory sockets.When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker repeatedly sounds a sequence ofone long and three short beeps, because the Graphics And Video Processor is missing. If thisdoes not happen, the memory modules must be exchanged.

6.3 Insert the Graphics And Video Processor into the appropriate socket and connect the monitordirectly.When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep and theBIOS copyright message appears on the screen. If this does not happen, the Graphics AndVideo Processor must be exchanged.

6.4 Insert the RDC into the appropriate socket.When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep, the BIOScopyright message appears on the screen and the radar software is started. If this does nothappen, the RDC must be exchanged.

6.5 Insert the remaining pcbs step by step and verify the function of the Display Electronics Unit.If any malfunctions are detected, the pcb inserted last must be exchanged.

8.2.5 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only)

If the service switch S1/8 of the RDC is switched on (see Section 4.5.4.2 on page 57), the sequentialstart of the processes is displayed during booting. When an error is detected, the booting is stopped andthe process which causes the problem can be recognized. This function may be helpful to localize aproblem in cooperation with the service department of the manufacturer.

8.2.6 The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System

If the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT is defective or the file system is faulty, the MULTIPILOT shuts downand reboots via the IDE memory module or it reboots via the IDE memory module after it has beenpowered down manually. This is caused by a modification of the boot sequence which is set automatically

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

183

during the booting.

The IDE memory module contains the complete operating system and application software of a RADAR-PILOT 1100. In this state, the complete radar functions are available.




If the automatic detection of the defective hard disk drive fails, the MULTIPILOT can be configured to startas a RADARPILOT by means of the MP1100 Setup CD-ROM. After the repair works has beencompleted, the system must be configured to boot as a MULTIPILOT. See the following descriptions.

8.2.6.1 Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100):

Proceed as follows:

1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM2. Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display

Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off by means of the powerswitch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).

3. The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?appears, click the NO button.

4. Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System(HDD) appears. Click the YES button.

5. Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.6. When prompted, remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.

The MULTIPILOT will now boot from the IDE memory module as a RADARPILOT 1100 until the standardMULTIPILOT function is enabled again as described in Section 8.2.6.2.

8.2.6.2 Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100):

1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM2. Enter the Maintenance Menus and start a software update.3. The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?

appears, click the NO button.4. Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System

(HDD) appears. Click the NO button.5. Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.6. Remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.

The MULTIPILOT 1100 will now boot from the hard disk drive as a MULTIPILOT 1100.

8.2.7 Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty

The following information is valid for the TFT monitors AZ3056G042, AZ3063G041, AZ3064G040,AZ3065G040, AZ3066G040, AZ3068G040.

If the colors, the brightness and/or the contrast of a monitor are not correct or if there are differencesbetween the monitors in one system, the reason might be that the user default settings which have beenset by the manufacturer have been modified.

Especially for ECDIS purposes, the monitors must be adjusted to the values which have been determinedduring the licensing. The values have been stored in a non-volatile memory of the monitor. In case of

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

184

uncertainty, these values can be re-loaded by the technician in the following way:

1. Open the OSD menu of the monitor (Menu key)

2. Load (Factory) Default must be selected

3. + must be pressed to open the submenus.




4. Load User Default must be selected.

Load Factory Default must NOT be selected. If this has happened, the user defaults must be loadedagain.

When the user defaults have been loaded, the following values must have been set:

- Brightness = 50- Contrast = 70- Fill to aspect ratio must have been set and NOT Fill Screen

Interferences as well as muddy vertical lines or slight indications of these effects are not permissible.

The fine tuning can be performed by means of the Frequency and Phase sliders. The adjustment shouldstart with the sliders in centre (50%) position.

8.2.8 Trackball Operation is Erratic

If the Trackball does not work properly, it is advisable to clean it. Usually, the Trackball has become dirtythrough crumbs or through spilt drinks.

To clean the Trackball, it must be removed from the Operating Unit. On the upper side of the Trackballthere are three screws which must be removed to open it.

The Trackball and the roll wheels can be cleaned by means of a soft cloth and alcohol.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

185



8.3 Software Update and Installation


8.3.1 System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100

To update the software, follow the instructions in Section 5.12.1 on page 140 on.

Please pay also attention to the following sections.

8.3.2 System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100

The operating system and the application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. Inaddition to that, the operating system and the software of a standard radar system are stored in an IDEmemory module. Both systems are installed on the MULTIPILOT 1100 ex works. They can be installedand updated simultaneously by means of the MP 1100 Setup CD. Usually, the MULTIPILOT runs withthe software of the hard-disk. In case of a problem with the hard-disk drive, it is still possible to use theMULTIPILOT as a radar, which runs with the software of the RDC. See Section 8.2.6 for further informa-tion.

For first installation of the software only (formatted or new hard-disk):

1. Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 to the OFF position to force the booting from the DVD-ROM drive orthe hard-disk. Set the boot sequence in the BIOS setup (Advanced BIOS Features) to SCSI,CDROM, HHD-0 as described in Section 5.14 from page 153 on.

2. Verify also the BIOS settings referring to Section 5.14 from page 153 on.

3. Verify that the IRQ of the RDC (first device displayed in the list) is not shared with the LAN networkadapter. Refer to the table of PCI devices which is displayed during the booting. If the IRQ numbersare shared, the BIOS settings must be checked.

4. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and onagain (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unithousing).

5. Follow the setup procedure:- Begin with installation procedure? Select YES- MP1100 application update? Select NO- Update operating system? Select NO- Create all new (all chart data will be lost)? Select YES- All chart data will be lost! Abort? Select NOThe hard-disk will be formatted, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT 1100 application soft-ware will be copied to the hard-disk and the RDC, the TCUs and the interface extensions will beprogrammed.

6. Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again to boot from the CD-ROM (if it is not possibleto switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off bymeans of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

186

7. Perform the manual modification of the boot procedure as described in Section 8.2.6.2 on page 184.

8. Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 back to ON position.




For regular software installation (older version of the MULTIPILOT software still installed):

This software installation is an update of an existing software version.

1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and onagain (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unithousing).

2. Follow the instructions of the setup procedure.

If the systems does not allow a regular software installation:

The operating system and the radar software are combined in one and the same program. This programis stored in the IDE memory module. Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to install the soft-ware. Only if the System Maintenance Manager cannot be started to update the software might itbe helpful to reinstall the complete software to find out whether the hardware is damaged or whether thesoftware installation was faulty.

It is definitely advisable to rule out any other reason for a defect before the system software isinstalled again.

1. To install the software, switch off the radar and open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit.

2. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC in accordance with the description in Section 4.5.4 on page 53.By means of this switch, the radar is forced to boot directly from the diskette drive.

3. Put the "Flash Update Facility Boot Disk" into the diskette drive.

4. Start the radar.

5. Follow the instructions.

6. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC back to the normal position and restart the radar.

7. Restore the parameters from another Display Electronics Unit of the system or from the backupdiskette. If no backup diskette or no other Display Electronics Unit is available, the parameters(system configuration) must be entered manually by means of the System Maintenance Manager.The parameters of the transceiver are stored in the TCU. They can be loaded from there. Checkwhether these transceiver parameters make sense.

8. Test that the radar is functioning correctly.

If the system parameters cannot be stored, even although the system software has recently beeninstalled, the RDC must be exchanged.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

187



8.4 Opening the Housings


8.4.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing

The cover of the Display Electronics Unit is fixed with 4 screws. Remove the screws to open the housing.

8.4.2 Interconnection Box

Depending on the version, the Interconnection Box is mounted under the Display Electronics Unit (seeFigure 2-3 on page 22) or as a single bulkhead housing. To open the bulkhead version, remove thescrews in the cover. To gain access to the Interconnection Box when it is mounted under the DisplayElectronics Unit, the Display Electronics Unit must be removed. To do this, unscrew (but do not remove)the 4 screws in the flange of the Display Electronics Unit, lift it about 10 mm and remove it. The cablesdo not have to be disconnected.

8.4.3 Console Housing

For service purposes, the console housings canbe opened at the base region.

To remove the cover in the base region, two locks(1) must be released. A special key is necessaryfor the locks.

The cover can be carefully pulled at the relief atits upper side (1). Then it must be lifted out of itsmounting hole in the base (2).

Fig. 8-1 Opening the console

ztr1

_087

.jpg

Locks

ztr1

_009

.gif

21

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

188

8.4.4 SCC C4 Console

The procedure at the SCC C4 console is similar to the procedure at the console housing describedabove.




8.4.5 Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit

8.4.6 Operating Unit

The Operating Unit is mounted in thesame way at the console or desktopversions (not valid for SCC C4console).

To gain access to the Operating Unit’sinterior, 4 screws below the OperatingUnit must be removed to unmount thecomplete Operating Unit. The cablelength is sufficient to turn the OperatingUnit without disconnection.

The lower shell of the Operating Unit isfixed by means of two screws whichmust be removed to unmount the shell.If the shell has been removed, theKeyboard Controller can be removedor configured. If the keyboards shall beremoved, the metal frame must beunmounted.

8.4.7 Monitor

Removing the Monitor

To gain access to the monitor, the front frame must be unmounted. It is fixed by means of four hexagonsocket screws, two on top of the monitor, two under the monitor.

Fig. 8-2 Opening the Operating Unit

ztr1

_123

.jpg

ztr1

_023

.jpg

ztr1

_029

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

189

Fig. 8-3 Unmounting the front frame

Screws

ztr1

_030

.jpg



8.5 Fuses

The screws at the underside must be untightened only. It is not necessary to remove them. When thescrews on top of the monitor have been removed, the frame can carefully be pulled from the housing.The operating panel of the monitor is fixed at the frame by means of four nuts. It is possible to disconnectthe cable at the panel.

The monitor is fixed by means of screwsaround the screen which are visible whenthe front frame has been removed. Thenumber of screws depends of the type(size) of monitor. To unmount the monitor,all screws must be removed. Then themonitor can be pulled carefully out of thehousing.

Checking the Cable Connections

The monitor and the Operating Unit are mounted onto the base part of the housing. Behind the monitor,the base part of the housing has a hood. The hood is fixed by means of screws on the left and on theright.

8.5 Fuses

See Section 8.8 on page 197 for the order numbers of the spare parts.

Interconnection Box (GE3044G216)

Analog Interface (GE3044G207)

No. Rating

F1 6.3 A slow blow

F2 6.3 A slow blow

F3 4 A slow blow

F4 0.1 A slow blow

F5 1 A slow blow

No. Rating

Fig. 8-4 Unmounting the monitor

ztr1

_031

.jpg

......

......

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

190

F1 0.5 A slow blow



8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing

COM Expander (GE3044G210)


8.6.1 Exchange of the Main Processor

The main processor is a standard PC Processor. It is plugged in a socket and can be removed withoutany tools after the fan has been removed. Different types of processors are in use, due to technicalprogress. For the exchange of the fan, see Section 8.6.14.2 on page 196.

NOTE:At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fanand the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.

8.6.2 Exchange of the Motherboard

The procedure for exchanging the motherboard depends on the version. Switch off the radar, open thehousing of the Display Electronics Unit and disconnect all cables on the motherboard and on the pcbs inthe slots. Remove the slot screws of all pcb’s and disconnect them (note the position - they must beconnected in the same slots of the new motherboard again or, if the replacement motherboard is of adifferent type, in the slots which are described in Section 4.5.3.2 on page 50). Remove the screws withwhich the motherboard is fixed in the housing. Replace the motherboard and wind in the screws withouttightening them. Insert the extension pcb’s into their slots and fasten the slot screws. Now tighten thescrews of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the installed extension pcb’s.

For the exchange of the main processor, see Section 8.6.1. For the exchange of the fan, see Section8.6.14.2 on page 196.

If the motherboard has been exchanged, the correct BIOS settings must be set in accordance withSection 5.14 on page 153 (if the motherboard is equipped with a soft power switch, this must be disabledby the BIOS settings before the system can be started).

NOTE:Some of the motherboards are equipped with an on-board sound option. In this case, the covers must beremoved from the openings for the sound connectors in the electronics unit’s housing.

WARNINGDo not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. Thejumpers are set ex works.

NOTE:

No. Rating

F1 2.0 A slow blow

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

191

At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fanand, depending on the spare part kit, the memory modules.




8.6.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules

The memory modules are standard PC modules (DIMM). The radars needs at least 256 MB memory. Thenumber of modules needed depends on the module capacity. To avoid incompatibilities, it is stronglyrecommended that only spare parts from SAM Electronics are used.

8.6.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery

The lifetime of the battery depends on the use of the Display Electronics Unit. The shelf life of the batteryitself is about 10 years. If the battery is mounted in a radar which is permanently or often in operation,the life will be about 5...7 years. In radars that are used rarely, the life may be even shorter.

When the CMOS backup battery is changed, the BIOS settings are lost and the settings must be re-entered by means of an additional ASCII keyboard.

To exchange the battery, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit andremove the pcbs which are positioned above the backup battery (each pcb is fixed by means of a screw).

The battery is fixed by means of a clamp. The clamp can be bent to exchange the battery. Insert the newbattery with inscription facing up.

Plug in and fix the pcbs in the same slots as before, close the housing and continue with the setting ofthe BIOS parameters.

The BIOS settings must be performed as described from Section 5.14 on page 153 on.

8.6.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213)

To change the GVP, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and removethe fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Replace the GVP and fix the new one with the screw.Further hardware or software settings are not necessary. The radar can be put into operation.

Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs is varies, so that thepressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and aninstallation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.

8.6.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module

To change the Ethernet network module, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display ElectronicsUnit and remove the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Disconnect the T-connector, replacethe network module and fix the new one with the screw. Further hardware or software settings are notnecessary. The radar can be put into operation.

If the Ethernet module is part of a CHARTRADAR 1100 and has been exchanged, the licensingmust be renewed, because the CHARTRADAR Identification Code has changed.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

192

Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs varies, so that thepressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and aninstallation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.




8.6.7 Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC)

The RDC contains the adjustment values for the video signals. The values cannot be saved and theadjustments must be repeated after the exchange.

To exchange the RDC, open the Display Electronics Unit.

1. Disconnect all cables from the pcb.

2. Unscrew the fastening screw of the RDC and pull the RDC carefully out of its slot.

3. Set the jumpers and DIP switches of the new RDC to the same positions as on the defective pcb.

4. Push the new RDC into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the cables.

5. Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must becompatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb softwareupdate must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further informationabout the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available viathe Internet).

6. Test whether the radar is functioning correctly.

7. Adjust the video signal amplitudes and offsets as described in Section 5.12.1 on page 140.

8.6.8 Exchange of the IDE Memory Module

The IDE memory module contains all parameters and the system software (operating system and radarapplication software) of the system. In a MULTIPILOT, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT appli-cation software are stored on the hard-disk. The same set of parameters is also stored on the hard-diskof the MULTIPILOT. Some parameters (transceiver parameters) are also stored in the TCU, and abackup diskette with all parameters should exist. If it is not certain that the parameters stored on thediskettes are current, it is advisable to make a backup (if possible). The parameters can be transferredfrom one Display Electronics Unit to all other Display Electronics Units (Config Transfer function). If it iscertain that another Display Electronics Unit of the system has the same (and complete) set of parame-ters for all units, they can be transferred to the Display Electronics Unit whose IDE memory module hasbeen exchanged.

To exchange the module, open the Display Electronics Unit.

1. Disconnect the module’s power supply cable.

2. Replace the module and connect the new one to the power supply. The power supply cable may bedifferent if another type of module is used, so that it must be exchanged, too.

3. The new module contains a default set of system parameters, an operating system and a radarapplication software. Check whether the module has been programmed with the current system soft-ware by means of the System Maintenance Manager (see Section 5.10.2 on page 111). If neces-sary, perform a software update.

4. Restore the parameters by means of the Config Transfer function (see Section 5.13), performed onanother Display Electronics Unit or from the backup diskette (some transceiver parameters can also

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

193

be restored from the TCU). If the Config Transfer function or a backup diskette is not available, thesystem must be parameterized manually. See Section 6 from page 157 on for further information.

5. Check the system configuration and test whether the radar is functioning correctly.




8.6.9 Exchange of the Analog Interface

To exchange the Analog Interface, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect itfrom the mains.

WARNINGIf a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Interface,dangerous voltages might be present, even although all supplies to theradar system are switched off. Short circuiting of the gyro will damagethe gyro output.

1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables andconnectors from the Analog Interface.

2. The Analog Interface is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.

3. Set the jumpers on the new Analog Interface pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.

4. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.

5. Switch on the power to the radar.

6. Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must becompatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb softwareupdate must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further informationabout the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available viainternet).

7. The Analog Interface contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in theRDC and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are auto-matically sent from the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface.

8.6.10 Exchange of the COM Expander

To exchange the COM Expander, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect itfrom the mains.

1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables andconnectors from the COM Expander.

2. Remove all plug-in adapter pcbs from the defective pcb and connect them to the corresponding slotof the spare part.

3. The COM Expander is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.

4. Set the jumpers on the new COM Expander pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.

5. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.

6. Switch on the power to the radar.

7. Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

194

compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb softwareupdate must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further informationabout the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available viainternet).




8. The COM Expander contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the RDCand on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are sent fromthe hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface automatically.

8.6.11 Exchange of the Diskette Drive

To exchange the diskette drive, the drive unit mustbe removed as described in Section 5.1 from page86 on.

For the correct connection of the data cable at thediskette drive, see Figure 8-5.

8.6.12 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply

To exchange the power supply, switch off the radar, disconnect the mains supply cable and open theDisplay Electronics Unit.

1. Disconnect all supply cables (power supply output).

2. The power supply unit is mounted by means of 4 screws. Two of them must be removed at the rear(outside) of the electronics unit housing; the other two screws must be removed inside the housing.

3. Fix the new power supply by means of the screws and connect the supply cables.

Fig. 8-5 Connection of the data cable at the diskette drive

ztr1

_200

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

195




8.6.13 Exchange of Filter Pads

The filter pad of the Display Electronics Unit’shousing must be changed or washed with a milddetergent every 3 months. If the Display ElectronicsUnit is installed in a dusty environment, the replace-ment or cleaning must be done more often.

The filter pad can be exchanged without tools. It istrapped under the metal cover of the Display Elec-tronics Unit’s fan outlet. Remove it at the covercorner which is not fixed by a screw.

The part number of the filter pad is:GE3044T030, order No. 2175640.

Washed filter pads must be allowed to drycompletely.

8.6.14 Exchange of Fans

8.6.14.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing

To remove the fan, open the cover of the housing. Disconnect the fan and unscrew the four nuts on thehousing of the fan. Exchange the fan and fix the new one with the four nuts. Connect the fan to the supplyand close the housing of the Display Electronics Unit. It is advisable to check the filter pad (see Section8.6.13) on this occasion.

8.6.14.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan

If the fan of the main processor of the motherboard is defective, it is possible that the main processoritself is damaged, too. The function of the main processor should be tested. Depending on the type ofprocessor, the lifetime of this component can be reduced drastically or destroyed within a few minutes ifit is allowed to run without a fan.

The method of exchanging the fan depends on the main processor type. Usually, the fan is fixed withmetal clamps which can be opened carefully by means of a small screwdriver. The fan must beconnected to a 3-pole connector on the motherboard next to the processor socket. This connector ismarked by a printed label on the motherboard pcb.

NOTE:

Location of the filter pad

ztr1

_062

.jpg

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

196

At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fanand the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.



8.7 Maintenance

8.7 Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

The maintenance of the radar is limited to the following tasks:

It is not necessary to exchange the gear lubricant oil.

8.8 Spare Parts

8.8.1 Spare Part Concept

Most of the components in the Display Electronics Unit are parts which cannot be serviced. In the caseof a defect, the complete part must be exchanged.

8.8.2 Spare Parts List

Some of the components of the Display Electronics Unit in particular will be modified at short intervals,so that it is likely that it will not be possible to deliver spare parts which are absolutely identical to theoriginal part. In such cases, a Technote for the exchange is delivered with the spare part and newversions of components are added to this manual as soon as possible.

Electronics Unit GE3066/GE3064/GE3065

Work Interval Remarks

Exchanging or cleaning the filter pad of the Display Electronics Unit

Every 3 months, depending on the dustiness of the environ-ment; operator’s maintenance work

Nevertheless, it makes sense to check the pad whenever maintenance or repair work has to be done.

Checking the housing fan and the CPU fan of the electronics unit

Whenever maintenance or repair work has been done

Exchanging the CMOS backup battery Every 5 years. See the hints in Section 8.6.4 on page

192.

Part Order No.

Motherboard with 1000 MHz Main Processor, Fan and Memory Module (Motherboard DFI CA64-TN) (GE3044G066) 300006104

ATX Power Supply (FSP300-60FPN) 300004624

Fan (3412N for Electronics Unit Housing) 5035335

Filter pad (GE3044T030, 110x110 mm) for Electronics Unit 2175640

Ethernet Module with Y-plug (LCS-8034TB) 300006169

Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G213) 300006090

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

197

RDC pcb (GE3044G219) 300005324

Set of Cables GE3044 (GE3062G005) 390001276

DVD-ROM drive (CD-ROM drive), MULTIPILOT only 390001331

Hard Disk Drive (40 GByte) 390000261



8.8 Spare Parts

Interconnection Box VS3034

Operating Unit BD3027

Trackball BD3028

Connector (female, supplying Operating Unit / Diskette Drive, T3303100) 5321296

CMOS backup battery CR2032 271126851

IDE Module with software (GE3062G001) 390002052

Part Order No.

Interconnection Board (GE3044G216) 300005044

Fuse Kit (VS3034G005) 390001271

Fuse, Analog Interface, F1, 0.5 A, slow blow 5070558

Fuses, Interconnection BoardF1, 6.3 A, slow blowF2, 6.3 A, slow blowF3, 4.0 A, slow blowF4, 0.1 A, slow blowF5, 1.0 A, slow blow

50710385071038507358550705515070561

COM Expander (GE3044G210) 300004738

Analog Interface pcb (Gyro/Log Interface, GE3044G207) 2571304

Analog Interface Kit (GE3044G059, Log/Gyro Interface) 2576100

RGB Buffer Kit (GE3044G062) 390000923

Plug-in pcb TTL (GE3044G211) 300004562

Plug-in pcb 20 mA current loop (TTY) (GE3044G212) 300004561

Plug-in pcb RS232 (GE3044G214) 300004560

Plug-in pcb RS422/RS485 (GE3044G218) 300004559

Modification Kit for Plug-in Adapter pcbs (VS3034G005) 390002198

Part Order No.

Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832

EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872

Radar Keyboard (0822/01) 5933833

TRACKPILOT Keyboard (0832/01) 5933831

Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 300004763

Fuse for GE3048G200, F1, 2.0 A, slow blow (SMD, 0454 002) 300005060

Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186

Part Order No.

Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832

Part Order No.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

198

EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872

Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186



8.8 Spare Parts

Interswitch (PCI)

8.8.3 Spare Parts for Monitors

The spare parts lists for the monitors are contained in the monitor service manuals.

If a monitor is not intended for service/repair, a separate technical manual is not available for this monitor.

Part Order No.

Processor Controlled Interswitch Board (PCI, NG3013G205) 1894740

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

199



8.8 Spare Parts

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

200


9 Technical Data

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions

9 Technical Data

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions

The Gearboxes and Scanners comply with DIN EN 60945 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunicationequipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results).

The system of protection required for the Gearbox by DIN EN 60945 is not valid for internal parts of theGearbox.

All components, except of the Scanner and the Gearbox (in Version A including the Transceiver Elec-tronics Unit) belong to the category "protected from the weather".

The Scanner and the Gearbox (in version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to thecategory "exposed to the weather".

9.2 Performance

9.2.1 Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

General Characteristics

- CMOS RAM with 32 kB- 4 serial interfaces RS422- 4 alarm outputs, 2 alarm inputs- 2 CAN bus interfaces for Radar Bus and Nav Bus

Characteristics of the Radar Video Processing

- Possible RPM of the antenna: 23 RPM, 28 RPM, 46 RPM, 56 RPM- Max. ship’s speed: 70 kt- Max. ship’s rate of turn: 1200°/min- Pulse length: variable from 80 to 1000 ns- Azimuth resolution: 1024 sweeps/circle = 0.35°- Transformation: 1024 sweeps/360°- Max. PRF for receiving: 4 kHz- Max. PRF for processing: 2 kHz- Ranges: 0.25 / 0.5 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 24 / 48 / 96 NM and

additionally two metric ranges with 250 / 500 m- Off-centre range: max. 75%- X/Y memory: 1024x1024x8 bit- DSP clock frequency: 50 Mhz- Video transmission to GVP: 15 Hz or higher

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

201

Characteristic of the ARPA Functionality

Tracks- Maximum number of targets: 50- Range: 20 NM- Max. speed (HSC, IEC 80/149 (936-2) D.1): true 70 kt


9 Technical Data

9.2 Performance

Manual target acquisition- Min. distance: 0.01 NM- Max. distance: 20 NM- Time until track stable: about 10 turns- Time until course and speed stable: about 15 turns

Automatic target acquisition:- Min. distance: 0.5 NM- Max. distance: 20 NM

• Number of target acquisition rings: 2• Number of target acquisition sectors: 2

Maximum own ship’s speed: 70 kt

9.2.2 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213

- Resolution: at least 1024 x 768 and 1280 x 1024 pixels- Vertical refresh rate: at least 70 Hz in all resolutions- Color depth: at least 256 colours- Bus frequency: compatible with 100 MHz bus

9.2.3 Performance Data of the Analog Interface

- Microcontroller Siemens SAB 80C167CR with the following specifications:- 2 kB internal RAM- 2 kB XRAM- 56 interrupt sources with 16 possible priority levels and separate interrupt vectors- 16 A/D converters- 9 timers (16 bit)- 2 serial interfaces- Programmable watchdog timer- Bootstrap loader- CAN controller

- Data memory 128 k x 8 bit RAM- Parameter memory 256 k x 6 bit EEPROM- Program memory 128 k x 8 bit flash-ROM- AIS interface (RS422) (≥Rev.03)

9.2.4 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)

- Maximum resolution: 1280 x 1024 pixels- Maximum vertical refresh rate: 75 Hz- Maximum horizontal rate: 80 kHz- Pixel clock: 135 MHz

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

202

Current consumption of the RGB Buffer board: about 190 mA


9 Technical Data

9.2 Performance

9.2.5 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply

The power supply units conform to the ATX specification.

- Mains voltage: 115 V / 230 V (switchable or automatic full range)

FSP300-60PFN:

- Max. mains consumption: 115 V/10 A, 230 V/5 A, 50...60 Hz- Output power: 300 W- Output voltages/currents:

Voltage Current

+3.3 V 28.0 A

+5 V 30.0 A

+12 V 15.0 A

-12 V 0.8 A

-5 V 0.3 A

+5 V stand-by 2.0 A

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

203


9 Technical Data

9.3 External Interfaces

9.3 External Interfaces

The Antenna Unit and the Transceiver have no external interfaces. The interfaces of the Display Elec-tronics Unit are described in Section 4.5.9. For the IEC 61162 interfaces, see the corresponding servicemanual.

9.3.1 Analog Interface

The interfaces for the analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and the pulse log can be parameterized fordifferent systems. For further information about the Analog Interface, see Section 4.5.10.

The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. Ifno signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.

9.3.1.1 Analog Gyro

Input voltage ranges: <35 V or >35 V (set by parameterization)Bearing resolution: 1/6° (typical) or 1/3°Sensor type: AC, DCReference frequency: 50 Hz, 60 Hz

9.3.1.2 Pulse Log

Number of axes: 1 (X-axis) or 2 (X-, Y-axis)Number of pulses per NM: 125, 200Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY

The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:

Input Function

XPM X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

YPM Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

BT Bottom track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

WT Water track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be configured in the service menus.

ST2 External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler input by jumper settings. See Section 4.5.10.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

204

9.3.2 COM Expander

4 serial interfaces which can be converted individually by means of plug-in adapter pcbs to RS232/RS422/RS485/TTL/TTY.


9 Technical Data

9.4 Power Supply

9.4 Power Supply

9.4.1 Display Electronics Unit

The mains supply required for the monitor depends on the type of monitor. See the monitor servicemanual. The keyboards are supplied with power by the Display Electronics Unit. The maximum powerconsumption of the power supply of the Display Electronics Unit is about 115 V / 7.4 A or 230 V / 4 A. TheATX power supply unit has a maximum power output of 350 W.

9.4.1.1 Operating Unit

The Operating Unit must be supplied with power via the PS/2 connector and the keyboard illuminationmust be supplied with power via an additional cable from the Display Electronics Unit.

The voltage supply is: 5 V DC ±10%

The following currents have been measured:

- All LEDs at max. brightness 490 mA- Without background illumination, 110 mA

status display at max. brightness- Without background illumination 50 mA

and status display

9.5 Dimensions and Weights

For dimensions and weights, see the technical drawings. The drawings are shown in Section 13.

9.6 Compass Safe Distances

Standard compass Steering compass Standard

compass reducedSteering compass

reduced

BD3028 Trackball 2.50 m 1.30 m

Desktop Unit19", AZ3068 2.25 m 1.10 m 1.35 m 0.70 m

Desktop Unit23.1", AZ3063 2.50 m 1.50 m 1.50 m 0.90 m

GE3062, GE3064, GE3065 Electronics Unit

0.45 m 0.30 m 0.30 m 0.30 m

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

205

Interconnection Box 0.50 m 0.40 m 0.30 m 0.30 m

GE3041Interswitch 1.50 m 0.90 m 0.90 m 0.55 m


9 Technical Data

9.6 Compass Safe Distances

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05

206


10 System Faults

10.1 System Fault Messages

10 System Faults

10.1 System Fault Messages

The following system faults are indicated by means of texts but not by means of codes.

10.2 AIS Faults

If a UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit is connected, see the technical manual of the AIS electronics unitfor further information.

Error Description

CONFIG TP SPECIAL DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "Special Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP SYSTEM DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "System Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP USER DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "User Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACK-PILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP INTERFACE DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "Interface Basic Setup" parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP ADVANCED DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "Advanced Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG TP RUDDER 1&2 DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The "Rudder 1&2 or Azimuth Thruster 1&2" parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

CONFIG EI PARAM. DIFFER(additional acoustic signal)

The Engine Interface parameters saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.

NEW INDICATOR CONFIG FILE A new set of parameters has been transmitted to the Indicator from a second Indicator. The message cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the Indicator has been restarted and therefore the new set of parameters is in use.

INTERSWITCH ADJUST The Interswitch (PCI) is switched to service mode.

INDICATOR SERVICE SWITCH The Indicator of this radar is switched to service mode (hardware switch). Programming of parameters and system configuration is possible.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

207


10 System Faults

10.3 System Fault Code List


The system fault codes are constantly under development. This list will be updated as often as possible.The list also contains the fault codes for the Transceiver Electronics Unit.

Abbreviations:

General:CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check PCB Printed Circuit BoardDMA Direct Memory Access PROM Programmable Read-Only MemoryEOT End Of Text QUEUE Kind of FIFO MemoryLEC Last Error Code ROT Rate-Of-Turn SensorNAK Negative Acknowledge SIO Serial Input Output (Serial COMM Port)NMEA National Marine Electronics Association

(standard for interfacing marine electronic devices)

WINDWind Sensor

Devices:AIS AIS system, see AIS manuals NAVBUS CAN1 Bus

ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (RDC) PCI Interswitch (Processor Controlled Inter-switch)

CFG Configuration RDC Radar Data ConverterFSYS File System RKE Remote Keyboard ElectronicsGYRO Non NMEA serial gyro systems SI9600 Ship’s InterfaceLAN LAN Network SP SPEEDPILOTMDB Track Data Base TP TRACKPILOTMON Monitor TRM Transceiver (CUT/TCU)MSI Analog Interface (Gyro/Log I/F) PCB

Subdevices:ADC Analog/Digital Converter GYRO GyroBITE Built-In Test Equipment IND Radar Indicator (Display Electronic Unit)

CAN_KB CAN-KBC (Remote Keyboard Electronics CAN-Bus) IVSC Part of RDC PCB

CAN0 Radar Bus LOG Log SensorCAN1 Navigation Bus MC MicrocontrollerCOMM Communication (generic) MPS Map Planning Station (Planning System)CONFIG Configuration (System Configuration) POS Position SensorConrac Monitor Manufacturer PROM Programmable Read-Only MemoryCPOOL Memory Pool PS/2 PS/2 interfaceDEPTH Depth Sensor QUEUE Queue SystemDOLOG DOLOG Sensor RAM Random Access MemoryDPM Dual-Ported Memory ROM Read Only MemoryDRIVER Device Driver ROT Rate of TurnDRV Driver SIO Serial Input/Output

Internal system resources (e.g. CPU

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

208

DSP Digital Signal Processor SYSTEM timer)EEPROM Electrically Erasable PROM UART UART


10 System Faults


System Faults:

Error Device Subdevice Info Recommended Action00131 FSYS Root filesystem checksum error 00132 FSYS File system error 2 00133 FSYS File system error 3 00134 FSYS File system error 4 00135 FSYS File system error 5 00136 FSYS File system error 6 00137 FSYS File system error 7 00138 FSYS File system error 8 00139 FSYS File system error 9

00141 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam corrupt 00142 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam was corrupt 00143 CFG CONFIG bad chart function license key

00501 RSC1 DRIVER device not found 00502 RSC1 DRIVER video DMA timeout 00503 RSC1 COMM timeout error 00504 RSC1 COMM timeout warning 00505 RSC1 COMM receive pool empty 00506 RSC1 COMM send pool empty 00507 RSC1 COMM received unmatched message type 00508 RSC1 COMM received unexpected message 00509 RSC1 COMM reset timeout error 00511 RSC1 DSP1 startup BITE failure 00512 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-Bus overrun 00513 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-DMA failure 00521 RSC1 DSP2 startup BITE failure 00522 RSC1 DSP2 sweep DMA overrun 00523 RSC1 DSP2 antenna azimuth step overflow 00524 RSC1 DSP2 sweep read timeout 00531 RSC1 IVSC TVA sync start error 00532 RSC1 IVSC TVA antenna azimuth data error 00533 RSC1 IVSC control fault

00601 MON1 Ser1 NAK received 00602 MON1 Ser1 EOT not found 00603 MON1 Ser1 checksum error 00604 MON1 Ser1 invalid telegram 00605 MON1 Ser1 invalid command 00606 MON1 Ser1 timeout, or monitor switched off

01101 RDC1 SIO1 receive pool empty 01102 RDC1 SIO1 receive FIFO full 01103 RDC1 SIO1 receive buffer insufficient 01104 RDC1 SIO1 send pool empty 01105 RDC1 SIO1 send FIFO full

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

209

01106 RDC1 SIO1 send buffer insufficient 01107 RDC1 SIO1 illegal interrupt 01108 RDC1 SIO1 unexpected transmit interrupt 01111 RDC1 SIO1 binary: lost block 01112 RDC1 SIO1 binary: lost bytes 01113 RDC1 SIO1 binary: checksum error 01115 RDC1 SIO1 gyro: lost bytes


10 System Faults


01117 RDC1 SIO1 STXETX: lost bytes 01121 RDC1 SIO1 chip: overrun error 01122 RDC1 SIO1 chip: parity error 01123 RDC1 SIO1 chip: framing error

01201 RDC1 SIO2 receive pool empty 01202 RDC1 SIO2 receive FIFO full 01203 RDC1 SIO2 receive buffer insufficient 01204 RDC1 SIO2 send pool empty 01205 RDC1 SIO2 send FIFO full 01206 RDC1 SIO2 send buffer insufficient 01207 RDC1 SIO2 illegal interrupt 01208 RDC1 SIO2 unexpected transmit interrupt 01211 RDC1 SIO2 binary: lost block 01212 RDC1 SIO2 binary: lost bytes 01213 RDC1 SIO2 binary: checksum error 01215 RDC1 SIO2 gyro: lost bytes 01217 RDC1 SIO2 STXETX: lost bytes 01221 RDC1 SIO2 chip: overrun error 01222 RDC1 SIO2 chip: parity error 01223 RDC1 SIO2 chip: framing error

01301 RDC1 SIO3 receive pool empty 01302 RDC1 SIO3 receive FIFO full 01303 RDC1 SIO3 receive buffer insufficient 01304 RDC1 SIO3 send pool empty 01305 RDC1 SIO3 send FIFO full 01306 RDC1 SIO3 send buffer insufficient 01307 RDC1 SIO3 illegal interrupt 01308 RDC1 SIO3 unexpected transmit interrupt 01311 RDC1 SIO3 binary: lost block 01312 RDC1 SIO3 binary: lost bytes 01313 RDC1 SIO3 binary: checksum error 01315 RDC1 SIO3 gyro: lost bytes 01317 RDC1 SIO3 STXETX: lost bytes 01321 RDC1 SIO3 chip: overrun error 01322 RDC1 SIO3 chip: parity error 01323 RDC1 SIO3 chip: framing error

01401 RDC1 SIO4 receive pool empty 01402 RDC1 SIO4 receive FIFO full 01403 RDC1 SIO4 receive buffer insufficient 01404 RDC1 SIO4 send pool empty 01405 RDC1 SIO4 send FIFO full 01406 RDC1 SIO4 send buffer insufficient 01407 RDC1 SIO4 illegal interrupt 01408 RDC1 SIO4 unexpected transmit interrupt 01411 RDC1 SIO4 binary: lost block

Error Device Subdevice Info Recommended Action

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

210

01412 RDC1 SIO4 binary: lost bytes 01413 RDC1 SIO4 binary: checksum error 01415 RDC1 SIO4 gyro: lost bytes 01417 RDC1 SIO4 STXETX: lost bytes 01421 RDC1 SIO4 chip: overrun error 01422 RDC1 SIO4 chip: parity error


10 System Faults


01423 RDC1 SIO4 chip: framing error

01501 RDC1 CAN0 initialization error 01502 RDC1 CAN0 receive pool empty 01503 RDC1 CAN0 receive FIFO full 01504 RDC1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient 01505 RDC1 CAN0 send pool empty 01506 RDC1 CAN0 send FIFO full 01507 RDC1 CAN0 send buffer insufficient 01508 RDC1 CAN0 unexpected transmit interrupt 01511 RDC1 CAN0 lost message 01512 RDC1 CAN0 message checksum error 01513 RDC1 CAN0 lost frame 01514 RDC1 CAN0 illegal frame type 01515 RDC1 CAN0 transmit request hang 01516 RDC1 CAN0 ghost interrupt 01517 RDC1 CAN0 receive overrun 01521 RDC1 CAN0 chip: warning 01522 RDC1 CAN0 chip: bus off 01523 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: no error 01524 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error 01525 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: form error 01526 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error 01527 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error 01528 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 0 error 01529 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error

01601 RDC1 CAN1 initialization error 01602 RDC1 CAN1 receive pool empty 01603 RDC1 CAN1 receive FIFO full 01604 RDC1 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient 01605 RDC1 CAN1 send pool empty 01606 RDC1 CAN1 send FIFO full 01607 RDC1 CAN1 send buffer insufficient 01608 RDC1 CAN1 unexpected transmit interrupt 01611 RDC1 CAN1 lost message 01612 RDC1 CAN1 message checksum error 01613 RDC1 CAN1 lost frame 01614 RDC1 CAN1 illegal frame type 01615 RDC1 CAN1 transmit request hang 01616 RDC1 CAN1 ghost interrupt 01617 RDC1 CAN1 receive overrun 01621 RDC1 CAN1 chip: warning 01622 RDC1 CAN1 chip: bus off 01623 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: no error 01624 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: stuff error 01625 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: form error 01626 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: acknowledge error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

211

01627 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: bit 1 error 01628 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: bit 0 error 01629 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: CRC error

01801 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (generic) 01802 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (AIS)


10 System Faults


01810 LAN1 DRV send error (generic) 01811 LAN1 DRV send error (AIS) 01820 LAN1 DRV receive error (generic) 01821 LAN1 DRV receive error (AIS)

01851 PIXMAP DRV send fifo full 01860 PIXMAP DRV send error 01870 PIXMAP DRV receive error

01901 MDB system track read error 01902 MDB track catalog read error

02011 TRM COMM checkword timeout 02012 TRM COMM checkword error 02013 TRM COMM protocol failure 02014 TRM COMM receive failure 02015 TRM COMM send failure 02021 TRM CONFIG X/S-Band mismatch 02022 TRM CONFIG generation mismatch (R9600/R1000) 02100 TRM SYSTEM clock failure 02124 TRM RAM error 02125 TRM ROM error 02130 TRM IND1 invalid message type 02131 TRM IND2 invalid message type 02132 TRM IND3 invalid message type 02133 TRM IND4 invalid message type 02134 TRM IND5 invalid message type 02135 TRM IND1 setup data 1 incomplete 02136 TRM IND2 setup data 1 incomplete 02137 TRM IND3 setup data 1 incomplete 02138 TRM IND4 setup data 1 incomplete 02139 TRM IND5 setup data 1 incomplete 02140 TRM IND1 invalid sector count value 02141 TRM IND2 invalid sector count value 02142 TRM IND3 invalid sector count value 02143 TRM IND4 invalid sector count value 02144 TRM IND5 invalid sector count value 02145 TRM IND1 transmit data timeout 02146 TRM IND2 transmit data timeout 02147 TRM IND3 transmit data timeout 02148 TRM IND4 transmit data timeout 02149 TRM IND5 transmit data timeout 02150 TRM IND1 invalid frequency deviation 02151 TRM IND2 invalid frequency deviation 02152 TRM IND3 invalid frequency deviation 02153 TRM IND4 invalid frequency deviation 02154 TRM IND5 invalid frequency deviation 02155 TRM IND1 reset handling error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

212

02156 TRM IND2 reset handling error 02157 TRM IND3 reset handling error 02158 TRM IND4 reset handling error 02159 TRM IND5 reset handling error 02160 TRM IND1 plausibility check failed 02161 TRM IND2 plausibility check failed


10 System Faults


02162 TRM IND3 plausibility check failed 02163 TRM IND4 plausibility check failed 02164 TRM IND5 plausibility check failed 02165 TRM IND1 setup data absent 02166 TRM IND2 setup data absent 02167 TRM IND3 setup data absent 02168 TRM IND4 setup data absent 02169 TRM IND5 setup data absent 02170 TRM IND1 checkword error 02171 TRM IND2 checkword error 02172 TRM IND3 checkword error 02173 TRM IND4 checkword error 02174 TRM IND5 checkword error 02175 TRM IND1 checkword timeout 02176 TRM IND2 checkword timeout 02177 TRM IND3 checkword timeout 02178 TRM IND4 checkword timeout 02179 TRM IND5 checkword timeout 02180 TRM IND1 invalid transmit data 02181 TRM IND2 invalid transmit data 02182 TRM IND3 invalid transmit data 02183 TRM IND4 invalid transmit data 02184 TRM IND5 invalid transmit data 02185 TRM IND1 invalid mode request 02186 TRM IND2 invalid mode request 02187 TRM IND3 invalid mode request 02188 TRM IND4 invalid mode request 02189 TRM IND5 invalid mode request 02190 TRM IND1 invalid indicator number 02191 TRM IND2 invalid indicator number 02192 TRM IND3 invalid indicator number 02193 TRM IND4 invalid indicator number 02194 TRM IND5 invalid indicator number 02195 TRM IND1 invalid PM parameter 02196 TRM IND2 invalid PM parameter 02197 TRM IND3 invalid PM parameter 02198 TRM IND4 invalid PM parameter 02199 TRM IND5 invalid PM parameter 02200 TRM IND1 setup data 1 incomplete 02201 TRM IND2 setup data 1 incomplete 02202 TRM IND3 setup data 1 incomplete 02203 TRM IND4 setup data 1 incomplete 02204 TRM IND5 setup data 1 incomplete 02205 TRM IND1 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold 02206 TRM IND2 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold 02207 TRM IND3 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold 02208 TRM IND4 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold 02209 TRM IND5 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

213

02210 TRM IND1 setup data 2 absent 02211 TRM IND2 setup data 2 absent 02212 TRM IND3 setup data 2 absent 02213 TRM IND4 setup data 2 absent 02214 TRM IND5 setup data 2 absent 02215 TRM IND1 invalid SEA (STC) curve


10 System Faults


02216 TRM IND2 invalid SEA (STC) curve 02217 TRM IND3 invalid SEA (STC) curve 02218 TRM IND4 invalid SEA (STC) curve 02219 TRM IND5 invalid SEA (STC) curve 02220 TRM IND1 invalid potentiometer curve 02221 TRM IND2 invalid potentiometer curve 02222 TRM IND3 invalid potentiometer curve 02223 TRM IND4 invalid potentiometer curve 02224 TRM IND5 invalid potentiometer curve 02270 TRM ADC interrupt tune 02271 TRM ADC interrupt auto SEA (STC) 02272 TRM invalid pulse per revolution count 02274 TRM invalid transceiver number 02275 TRM no antenna rotation 02276 TRM no external trigger 02277 TRM external trigger exceeds minimum 02278 TRM external trigger exceeds maximum 02279 TRM magnetron current failure - Check F1 on the Power Supply

Unit NG3028G202- Check the correct functioning of

the HV supply switch in thetransceiver housing/Gearbox.

- Exchange the Pulse Generator NG3028G203 or NG3028G206

- Exchange Magnetron- Exchange TCU NG3028G201- Exchange Power Supply

NG3028G 202- Exchange Mains Transformer

NG3028G007 X-Band orNG3029G007 (S-Band)

02280 TRM magnetron fatal error

02281 TRM no trigger 02300 TRM CAN0 checkword timeout 02301 TRM CAN0 checkword error 02302 TRM CAN0 invalid CAN object number 02303 TRM CAN0 invalid message type 02304 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in progress) 02305 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in queue) 02310 TRM CAN0 unknown error 02311 TRM CAN0 invalid parameter 02312 TRM CAN0 invalid write max value 02313 TRM CAN0 standard: checksum error 02314 TRM CAN0 standard: invalid block count 02315 TRM CAN0 receive buffer insufficient 02316 TRM CAN0 chip: reset hang 02317 TRM CAN0 invalid interrupt 02318 TRM CAN0 standard: lost block 02319 TRM CAN0 short pool empty 02320 TRM CAN0 long pool empty 02321 TRM CAN0 chip: bus off 02322 TRM CAN0 re-initialization error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

214

02405 TRM BITE test not available 02406 TRM BITE BITE still active 02407 TRM BITE BITE inactive 02410 TRM BITE test not available 02411 TRM DPM select error 02412 TRM DPM lower RAM error


10 System Faults


02413 TRM DPM upper RAM error 02414 TRM ADC conversion error 02420 TRM supply voltage error 02500 TRM EEPROM checksum error 02501 TRM EEPROM write timeout 02502 TRM EEPROM first time initialization (new device) 02503 TRM SYSTEM controller watchdog 02504 TRM SYSTEM stack overflow 02505 TRM SYSTEM stack underflow 02506 TRM SYSTEM undefined operation 02507 TRM SYSTEM protection fault 02508 TRM SYSTEM illegal word access 02509 TRM SYSTEM illegal instruction access 02510 TRM ADC limit error: +5 V 02511 TRM ADC limit error: +28 V 02512 TRM ADC limit error: +15 V 02513 TRM ADC limit error: -15 V 02514 TRM ADC limit error: +24 V 02515 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error 02516 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error 02517 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error 02518 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 0 error 02519 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error 02520 TRM no video 02521 TRM magnetron operation hours limit 02522 TRM EEPROM data compare error 02523 TRM try high speed antenna without option 02524 TRM magnetron heating voltage error 02525 TRM magnetron bias current error 02526 TRM adjust magnetron currents

03010 NAVBUS checkword timeout 03011 NAVBUS checkword error 03012 NAVBUS incompatible version 03013 NAVBUS no navigation data from sensor master 03014 NAVBUS fast gyro timeout 03020 NAVBUS multiple sensor master

03101 SI9600 CPOOL error (1..3) 03102 SI9600 CPOOL invalid pool 03103 SI9600 CPOOL invalid buffer 03104 SI9600 CPOOL pool empty 03111 SI9600 QUEUE error (1..4) 03112 SI9600 QUEUE receive event w/o buffer 03113 SI9600 QUEUE invalid queue 03114 SI9600 QUEUE invalid buffer 03115 SI9600 QUEUE BAB pool empty 03124 SI9600 RAM error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

215

03125 SI9600 ROM error 03130 SI9600 EEPROM checksum error 03131 SI9600 EEPROM erase error 03132 SI9600 EEPROM write hang 03133 SI9600 EEPROM data error 03135 SI9600 LOG invalid configuration


10 System Faults


03136 SI9600 LOG VX noise 03137 SI9600 LOG VY noise 03138 SI9600 POS invalid configuration 03139 SI9600 CONFIG reset missing 03140 SI9600 CONFIG data changed 03141 SI9600 WIND double source 03142 SI9600 DEPTH double source 03143 SI9600 CONFIG SI to SI error 03150 SI9600 GYRO sample start missing 03151 SI9600 GYRO RST phase error 03152 SI9600 GYRO phase jumping 03153 SI9600 GYRO RST oscillating 03154 SI9600 GYRO CAN id 16 timeout 03155 SI9600 GYRO serial data timeout 03156 SI9600 ROT serial data timeout 03157 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: serial data error 03158 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: serial data error 03159 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error 03160 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: checksum error 03161 SI9600 GYRO NMEA: serial data error 03162 SI9600 ROT NMEA: serial data error 03163 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: serial data error 03164 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: serial data error 03165 SI9600 GYRO serial data jumping 03166 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error 03167 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: checksum error 03168 SI9600 COMPASS reference error 03169 SI9600 COMPASS difference error 03170 SI9600 SIO pool initialization error 03171 SI9600 SIO pool back 03172 SI9600 SIO pool empty 03173 SI9600 SIO buffer insufficient 03211 SI9600 SIO1 send timeout 03212 SI9600 SIO1 receive error 03213 SI9600 SIO1 send error 03214 SI9600 SIO1 invalid message length 03215 SI9600 SIO1 checkword timeout 03216 SI9600 SIO1 data timeout 03221 SI9600 SIO2 send timeout 03222 SI9600 SIO2 receive error 03223 SI9600 SIO2 send error 03224 SI9600 SIO2 invalid message length 03225 SI9600 SIO2 checkword timeout 03226 SI9600 SIO2 data timeout 03231 SI9600 SIO3 send timeout 03232 SI9600 SIO3 receive error 03233 SI9600 SIO3 send error 03234 SI9600 SIO3 invalid message length


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

216

03235 SI9600 SIO3 checkword timeout 03236 SI9600 SIO3 data timeout 03241 SI9600 SIO4 send timeout 03242 SI9600 SIO4 receive error 03243 SI9600 SIO4 send error 03244 SI9600 SIO4 invalid message length


10 System Faults


03245 SI9600 SIO4 checkword timeout 03246 SI9600 SIO4 data timeout 03251 SI9600 SIO5 send timeout 03252 SI9600 SIO5 receive error 03253 SI9600 SIO5 send error 03254 SI9600 SIO5 invalid message length 03255 SI9600 SIO5 checkword timeout 03256 SI9600 SIO5 data timeout 03261 SI9600 SIO6 send timeout 03262 SI9600 SIO6 receive error 03263 SI9600 SIO6 send error 03264 SI9600 SIO6 invalid message length 03265 SI9600 SIO6 checkword timeout 03266 SI9600 SIO6 data timeout 03271 SI9600 SIO7 send timeout 03272 SI9600 SIO7 receive error 03273 SI9600 SIO7 send error 03274 SI9600 SIO7 invalid message length 03275 SI9600 SIO7 checkword timeout 03276 SI9600 SIO7 data timeout 03281 SI9600 SIO8 send timeout 03282 SI9600 SIO8 receive error 03283 SI9600 SIO8 send error 03284 SI9600 SIO8 invalid message length 03285 SI9600 SIO8 checkword timeout 03286 SI9600 SIO8 data timeout 03290 SI9600 MPS checkword timeout 03291 SI9600 MPS checkword error 03292 SI9600 MPS track checksum error 03300 SI9600 CAN1 checkword timeout 03301 SI9600 CAN1 checkword error 03302 SI9600 CAN1 invalid CAN object number 03303 SI9600 CAN1 invalid message type 03304 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in progress) 03305 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in queue) 03310 SI9600 CAN1 unknown error 03311 SI9600 CAN1 invalid parameter 03312 SI9600 CAN1 invalid write max value 03313 SI9600 CAN1 standard: checksum error 03314 SI9600 CAN1 standard: invalid block count 03315 SI9600 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient 03316 SI9600 CAN1 chip: reset hang 03317 SI9600 CAN1 invalid interrupt 03318 SI9600 CAN1 standard: lost block 03319 SI9600 CAN1 short pool empty 03320 SI9600 CAN1 long pool empty 03321 SI9600 CAN1 chip: bus off 03330 SI9600 CAN1 pool back


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

217

03331 SI9600 CAN1 pool empty 03401 SI9600 SIO1 checksum error 03402 SI9600 SIO2 checksum error 03403 SI9600 SIO3 checksum error 03404 SI9600 SIO4 checksum error 03405 SI9600 SIO5 checksum error


10 System Faults


03406 SI9600 SIO6 checksum error 03407 SI9600 SIO7 checksum error 03408 SI9600 SIO8 checksum error 03410 SI9600 DOLOG invalid message length 03411 SI9600 DOLOG sensor timeout 03412 SI9600 DOLOG speed timeout 03413 SI9600 DOLOG depth timeout 03498 SI9600 invalid configuration 03500 SI9600 BITE test not available

03614 AIS SIR10T receive failure 03615 AIS SIR10T send failure 03616 AIS SIR10T SIR10T timeout 03617 AIS AIS AIS timeout

03701 GYRO C.Plath: 01 - Failure of gyro power supply 03702 GYRO C.Plath: 02 - Reset of the controller

03703 GYRO C.Plath: 03 - Computer is in test mode or dip-switch ’External Synchronisation’ closed

03704 GYRO C.Plath: 04 - RAM internal error 03705 GYRO C.Plath: 05 - RAM external error 03706 GYRO C.Plath: 06 - PROM checksum error

03707 GYRO C.Plath: 07 - Heading error at 2 deg light barrier

03708 GYRO C.Plath: 08 - Heading error at 360 deg light barrier

03709 GYRO C.Plath: 09 - Failure of 2 deg light barrier 03710 GYRO C.Plath: 10 - Failure of 360 deg light barrier 03711 GYRO C.Plath: 11 - Watchdog alarm 03712 GYRO C.Plath: 12 - Heading not synchronized 03713 GYRO C.Plath: 13 - Reset after Power-Down-Mode 03714 GYRO C.Plath: 14 - RAM-Power alarm 03715 GYRO C.Plath: 15 - AD-Failure 03716 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error 03717 GYRO C.Plath: sync bit error 03718 GYRO C.Plath: message size error 03719 GYRO C.Plath: magnetic compass 03721 GYRO Anschuetz: second gyro differs 03722 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro invalid 03723 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro phase < 45 deg 03724 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro settling phase 03725 GYRO Anschuetz: sensor not available 03726 GYRO Anschuetz: heading jumping 03727 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error 03728 GYRO Anschuetz: high bit error 03729 GYRO Anschuetz: system error 03730 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro error 03740 GYRO GYRO heading jump


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

218

03801 SI1 RAM error 03802 SI1 ROM error 03803 SI1 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error 03804 SI1 CAN1 buffer error 03805 SI1 CAN1 protocol error 03806 SI1 EEPROM error


10 System Faults


03807 SI1 MC system error 03808 SI1 GYRO RST oscillating 03809 SI1 GYRO RST combination error 03810 SI1 GYRO RST step size error 03811 SI1 GYRO reference timeout 03812 SI1 GYRO error input 03813 SI1 LOG error input 03814 SI1 LOG VX input error 03815 SI1 LOG VY input error 03816 SI1 AIS target overflow 03817 SI1 COMM checkword timeout 03818 SI1 COMM checkword error 03819 SI1 COMM incompatible version 03820 SI1 COMM invalid message type 03824 SI1 CPOOL CPOOL error 03825 SI1 CPOOL Pool bad 03826 SI1 CPOOL Buffer bad 03827 SI1 CPOOL Pool empty 03828 SI1 QUEUE Queue error 03829 SI1 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer 03830 SI1 QUEUE Queue bad 03831 SI1 QUEUE Buffer bad 03832 SI1 QUEUE BAB pool empty 03833 SI1 LOG Configuration fault 03834 SI1 UART1 Read error 03835 SI1 UART1 Write error 03836 SI1 UART1 Message length ill 03837 SI1 UART1 Data time-out 03838 SI1 UART2 Read error 03839 SI1 UART2 Write error 03840 SI1 UART2 Message length ill 03841 SI1 UART2 Data time-out 03842 SI1 UART3 Read error 03843 SI1 UART3 Write error 03844 SI1 UART3 Message length ill 03845 SI1 UART3 Data time-out 03846 SI1 UART4 Read error 03847 SI1 UART4 Write error 03848 SI1 UART4 Message length ill 03849 SI1 UART4 Data time-out 03850 SI1 UART5 Read error 03851 SI1 UART5 Write error 03852 SI1 UART5 Message length ill 03853 SI1 UART5 Data time-out 03854 SI1 UART6 Read error 03855 SI1 UART6 Write error 03856 SI1 UART6 Message length ill 03857 SI1 UART6 Data time-out


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

219

03858 SI1 UART7 Read error 03859 SI1 UART7 Write error 03860 SI1 UART7 Message length ill 03861 SI1 UART7 Data time-out 03862 SI1 UART8 Read error 03863 SI1 UART8 Write error


10 System Faults


03864 SI1 UART8 Message length ill 03865 SI1 UART8 Data time-out 03866 SI1 CAN1 No check 03867 SI1 CAN1 Bad check 03868 SI1 CAN1 Bad object ID 03869 SI1 CAN1 Bad transfer number 03870 SI1 CAN1 Send in progress 03871 SI1 CAN1 Send in queue 03872 SI1 CAN1 Unknown error 03873 SI1 CAN1 Bad parameters 03874 SI1 CAN1 Bad write maximum 03875 SI1 CAN1 Bad checksum 03876 SI1 CAN1 Bad block count 03877 SI1 CAN1 Receive buffer too small 03878 SI1 CAN1 Reset hang 03879 SI1 CAN1 Bad interrupt 03880 SI1 CAN1 Lost data block 03881 SI1 CAN1 Short pool empty 03882 SI1 CAN1 Long pool empty 03883 SI1 CAN1 Bus error 03884 SI1 CAN1 Send bool back 03885 SI1 CAN1 Send bool empty 03886 SI1 UART1 Checksum error 03887 SI1 UART2 Checksum error 03888 SI1 UART3 Checksum error 03889 SI1 UART4 Checksum error 03890 SI1 UART5 Checksum error 03891 SI1 UART6 Checksum error 03892 SI1 UART7 Checksum error 03893 SI1 UART8 Checksum error 03894 SI1 SI Configuration wrong 03895 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro time out 03896 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error

03901 SI2 RAM error 03902 SI2 ROM error 03903 SI2 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error 03904 SI2 CAN1 buffer error 03905 SI2 CAN1 protocol error 03906 SI2 EEPROM error 03907 SI2 MC system error 03908 SI2 GYRO RST oscillating 03909 SI2 GYRO RST combination error 03910 SI2 GYRO RST step size error 03911 SI2 GYRO reference timeout 03912 SI2 GYRO error input 03913 SI2 LOG error input 03914 SI2 LOG VX input error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

220

03915 SI2 LOG VY input error 03916 SI2 AIS target overflow 03917 SI2 COMM checkword timeout 03918 SI2 COMM checkword error 03919 SI2 COMM incompatible version 03920 SI2 COMM invalid message type


10 System Faults


03924 SI2 CPOOL CPOOL error 03925 SI2 CPOOL Pool bad 03926 SI2 CPOOL Buffer bad 03927 SI2 CPOOL Pool empty 03928 SI2 QUEUE Queue error 03929 SI2 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer 03930 SI2 QUEUE Queue bad 03931 SI2 QUEUE Buffer bad 03932 SI2 QUEUE BAB pool empty 03933 SI2 LOG Configuration fault 03934 SI2 UART1 Read error 03935 SI2 UART1 Write error 03936 SI2 UART1 Message length ill 03937 SI2 UART1 Data time-out 03938 SI2 UART2 Read error 03939 SI2 UART2 Write error 03940 SI2 UART2 Message length ill 03941 SI2 UART2 Data time-out 03942 SI2 UART3 Read error 03943 SI2 UART3 Write error 03944 SI2 UART3 Message length ill 03945 SI2 UART3 Data time-out 03946 SI2 UART4 Read error 03947 SI2 UART4 Write error 03948 SI2 UART4 Message length ill 03949 SI2 UART4 Data time-out 03950 SI2 UART5 Read error 03951 SI2 UART5 Write error 03952 SI2 UART5 Message length ill 03953 SI2 UART5 Data time-out 03954 SI2 UART6 Read error 03955 SI2 UART6 Write error 03956 SI2 UART6 Message length ill 03957 SI2 UART6 Data time-out 03958 SI2 UART7 Read error 03959 SI2 UART7 Write error 03960 SI2 UART7 Message length ill 03961 SI2 UART7 Data time-out 03962 SI2 UART8 Read error 03963 SI2 UART8 Write error 03964 SI2 UART8 Message length ill 03965 SI2 UART8 Data time-out 03966 SI2 CAN1 No check 03967 SI2 CAN1 Bad check 03968 SI2 CAN1 Bad object ID 03969 SI2 CAN1 Bad transfer number 03970 SI2 CAN1 Send in progress 03971 SI2 CAN1 Send in queue


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

221

03972 SI2 CAN1 Unknown error 03973 SI2 CAN1 Bad parameters 03974 SI2 CAN1 Bad write maximum 03975 SI2 CAN1 Bad checksum 03976 SI2 CAN1 Bad block count 03977 SI2 CAN1 Receive buffer too small


10 System Faults


03978 SI2 CAN1 Reset hang 03979 SI2 CAN1 Bad interrupt 03980 SI2 CAN1 Lost data block 03981 SI2 CAN1 Short pool empty 03982 SI2 CAN1 Long pool empty 03983 SI2 CAN1 Bus error 03984 SI2 CAN1 Send bool back 03985 SI2 CAN1 Send bool empty 03986 SI2 UART1 Checksum error 03987 SI2 UART2 Checksum error 03988 SI2 UART3 Checksum error 03989 SI2 UART4 Checksum error 03990 SI2 UART5 Checksum error 03991 SI2 UART6 Checksum error 03992 SI2 UART7 Checksum error 03993 SI2 UART8 Checksum error 03994 SI2 SI Configuration wrong 03995 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro time out 03996 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error

04010 RDC1 ARPA azimuth fault 04011 RDC1 ARPA video interrupt timeout

04020 RDC1 ARPA video offset low, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust

04021 RDC1 ARPA video offset high, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust

04022 RDC1 ARPA video gain low, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust or too much SEA(STC)

04023 RDC1 ARPA video gain high, check RDC ARPA threshold adjust

04100 RDC1 ARPA target acquired twice 04101 RDC1 ARPA target distance small 04102 RDC1 ARPA no sweeps in video memory 04103 RDC1 ARPA sweep to sweep angle small 04104 RDC1 ARPA unexpected change of sweep to sweep angle 04105 RDC1 ARPA time per revolution small 04106 RDC1 ARPA PRF out of limits 04107 RDC1 ARPA target bearing not in video memory 04108 RDC1 ARPA target bearing disappeared in video memory 04109 RDC1 ARPA target speed out of limit 04110 RDC1 ARPA target size large 04111 RDC1 ARPA shutdown received

05011 PCI1 COMM checkword timeout 05012 PCI1 COMM checkword error 05014 PCI1 COMM receive error 05015 PCI1 COMM send error 05100 PCI1 SYSTEM clock error 05124 PCI1 RAM error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

222

05125 PCI1 ROM error 05130 PCI1 RELAY 0 switch error 05131 PCI1 RELAY 1 switch error 05132 PCI1 RELAY 2 switch error 05133 PCI1 RELAY 3 switch error 05134 PCI1 RELAY 4 switch error


10 System Faults


05135 PCI1 RELAY 5 switch error 05136 PCI1 RELAY 6 switch error 05137 PCI1 RELAY 7 switch error 05138 PCI1 RELAY 8 switch error 05139 PCI1 RELAY 9 switch error 05140 PCI1 RELAY 10 switch error 05141 PCI1 RELAY 11 switch error 05142 PCI1 RELAY 12 switch error 05143 PCI1 RELAY 13 switch error 05144 PCI1 RELAY 14 switch error 05145 PCI1 RELAY 15 switch error 05146 PCI1 RELAY 16 switch error 05147 PCI1 RELAY 17 switch error 05148 PCI1 RELAY 18 switch error 05149 PCI1 RELAY 19 switch error 05150 PCI1 RELAY 20 switch error 05151 PCI1 RELAY 21 switch error 05152 PCI1 RELAY 22 switch error 05153 PCI1 RELAY 23 switch error 05154 PCI1 RELAY 24 switch error 05155 PCI1 RELAY 0 i/o error 05156 PCI1 RELAY 1 i/o error 05157 PCI1 RELAY 2 i/o error 05158 PCI1 RELAY 3 i/o error 05159 PCI1 RELAY 4 i/o error 05160 PCI1 IND1 invalid inter-switch request 05161 PCI1 IND2 invalid inter-switch request 05162 PCI1 IND3 invalid inter-switch request 05163 PCI1 IND4 invalid inter-switch request 05164 PCI1 IND5 invalid inter-switch request 05165 PCI1 IND1 invalid transmit data 05166 PCI1 IND2 invalid transmit data 05167 PCI1 IND3 invalid transmit data 05168 PCI1 IND4 invalid transmit data 05169 PCI1 IND5 invalid transmit data 05170 PCI1 target device overflow 05171 PCI1 unknown i/o device 05172 PCI1 unable to release CAN chip 05173 PCI1 unable to release relay matrix 05174 PCI1 unable to release i/o relay 05300 PCI1 CAN0 checkword timeout 05301 PCI1 CAN0 checkword error 05302 PCI1 CAN0 invalid CAN object number 05303 PCI1 CAN0 invalid message type 05304 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in progress) 05305 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in queue) 05310 PCI1 CAN0 unknown error 05311 PCI1 CAN0 invalid parameter


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

223

05312 PCI1 CAN0 invalid write max value 05313 PCI1 CAN0 standard: checksum error 05314 PCI1 CAN0 standard: invalid block count 05315 PCI1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient 05316 PCI1 CAN0 chip: reset hang 05317 PCI1 CAN0 invalid interrupt


10 System Faults


05318 PCI1 CAN0 standard: lost block 05319 PCI1 CAN0 short pool empty 05320 PCI1 CAN0 long pool empty 05321 PCI1 CAN0 chip: bus off 05322 PCI1 CAN0 re-initialization error 05405 PCI1 BITE test not available 05406 PCI1 BITE BITE still active 05407 PCI1 BITE BITE inactive 05410 PCI1 BITE test not available

06001 TP DRIVER checkword timeout 06002 TP DRIVER checkword error 06005 TP DRIVER cancel timeout 06006 TP DRIVER BITE timeout 06007 TP DRIVER no BITE response 06101 TP NAV CPOOL: error (1..3) 06102 TP NAV CPOOL: invalid pool 06103 TP NAV CPOOL: invalid buffer 06104 TP NAV CPOOL: pool empty 06111 TP NAV QUEUE: error (1..4) 06112 TP NAV QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer 06113 TP NAV QUEUE: invalid queue 06114 TP NAV QUEUE: invalid buffer 06115 TP NAV QUEUE: BAB pool empty 06124 TP NAV RAM: error 06125 TP NAV ROM: error 06127 TP NAV CMOS-RAM: error 06128 TP NAV Using default paramter for TP 06129 TP NAV Paramter organization bad 06130 TP NAV Paramter general failure 06131 TP NAV Paramter protect hang 06132 TP NAV Paramter lock hang 06133 TP NAV Paramter programming timeout 06134 TP NAV Paramter verify failed 06139 TP NAV Address overflow 06140 TP NAV Parameter user & system invalid 06141 TP NAV Tp settings invalid 06142 TP NAV Parameter special invalid 06143 TP NAV Parameter tp interface invalid 06150 TP NAV Lost data (CAN curve buffer small) 06180 TP NAV Invalid TP configuration (2*TP1 or 2*TP2) 06181 TP NAV Slave system displays wrong control mode 06199 TP NAV Ghost interrupt from PIC 06201 TP NAV Serial message not send 06211 TP NAV SIO receive error 06212 TP NAV SIO send error 06213 TP NAV SIO invalid message length 06214 TP NAV SIO checkword timeout


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

224

06215 TP NAV Lost data: SYN TX buffer small 06216 TP NAV Lost data: TP-SYN buffer small 06217 TP NAV Lost data: SP-SYN buffer small 06219 TP NAV Lost data: CHL-SYN buffer small 06220 TP NAV Track checksum error 06221 TP NAV Track parameter 1 error


10 System Faults


06222 TP NAV Track parameter 2 error 06223 TP NAV Track parameter 3 error 06224 TP NAV Track parameter 4 error 06225 TP NAV Track parameter 5 error 06226 TP NAV Track checksum error 1 06227 TP NAV Track checksum error 2 06228 TP NAV Track checksum error 3 06229 TP NAV Track checksum error 4 06230 TP NAV Track-Data new 06231 TP NAV Track-Data changed 06232 TP NAV Track-Data not complete 06233 TP NAV Equal Waypoints or Turnpoints following 06234 TP NAV WPT synchronisation disturbed 06235 TP NAV New recalculation of navigation 06236 TP NAV Track lat/lon error 06238 TP NAV WPT-request to fast 06239 TP NAV WPT-request to slow 06240 TP NAV NAV-X/Y overflow 06241 TP NAV NAV-Xrel overflow 06242 TP NAV NAV-Yrel overflow 06243 TP NAV NAV-Delta XB overflow 06244 TP NAV NAV-Delta YB overflow 06245 TP NAV NAV-Delta XC overflow 06246 TP NAV NAV-Delta YC overflow 06247 TP NAV Track checksum error 06248 TP NAV Track checksum error 1 06249 TP NAV Track checksum error 2 06250 TP NAV FPU not available 06251 TP NAV FPU initialization error 06252 TP NAV FPU domain error 06253 TP NAV FPU result error 06255 TP NAV FPU test 1 error 06256 TP NAV FPU test 2 error 06257 TP NAV FPU test 3 error 06258 TP NAV FPU test 4 error 06259 TP NAV FPU test 5 error 06260 TP NAV Position timeout 06261 TP NAV Course/Speed timeout 06262 TP NAV Date/Time timeout 06263 TP NAV WPT-Track timeout 06264 TP NAV Processing timeout 06300 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout 06301 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error 06302 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number 06303 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type 06304 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress) 06305 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) 06310 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

225

06311 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter 06312 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value 06313 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error 06314 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count 06315 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient 06316 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang


10 System Faults


06317 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt 06318 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block 06319 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty 06320 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty 06321 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off 06400 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout 06401 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error 06402 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number 06403 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type 06404 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress) 06405 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in queue) 06410 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown check 06411 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter 06412 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value 06413 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error 06414 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count 06415 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient 06416 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang 06417 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt 06418 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block 06419 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty 06420 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty 06421 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off 06480 TP NAV CAN send nav pool empty 06481 TP NAV CAN send nav pool back 06501 TP NAV MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool 06502 TP NAV MMCI pool is empty 06503 TP NAV MMCI message queue error 06504 TP NAV MMCI pool size too small during initialization 06505 TP NAV MMCI function address is null 06506 TP NAV MMCI received event without buffer queue

06507 TP NAV MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area

06508 TP NAV MMCI message queue clear to send timeout 06509 TP NAV MMCI invalid message length received 06510 TP NAV MMCI illegal partition size 06511 TP NAV MMCI lost data during receive 06520 TP NAV TpReg checkword timeout 06521 TP NAV TpReg checkword error 06522 TP NAV TpReg invalid message type 06530 TP NAV TpReg BITE timeout 06549 TP NAV TpReg unknown error code 06551 TP REG MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool 06552 TP REG MMCI pool is empty 06553 TP REG MMCI message queue error 06554 TP REG MMCI pool size too small during initialization 06555 TP REG MMCI error function address is null 06556 TP REG MMCI received event without buffer queue


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

226

06557 TP REG MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area

06558 TP REG MMCI message queue clear to send timeout 06559 TP REG MMCI invalid message length received 06560 TP REG MMCI illegal partition size 06561 TP REG MMCI lost data during receive 06580 TP REG TpNav checkword timeout


10 System Faults


06581 TP REG TpNav checkword error 06601 TP REG CPOOL error (1..3) 06602 TP REG CPOOL invalid pool 06603 TP REG CPOOL invalid buffer 06604 TP REG CPOOL pool empty 06611 TP REG QUEUE error (1..4) 06612 TP REG QUEUE receive event w/o buffer 06613 TP REG QUEUE invalid queue 06614 TP REG QUEUE invalid buffer 06615 TP REG QUEUE BAB pool empty 06624 TP REG RAM error 06625 TP REG ROM error 06626 TP REG Missing EEPROM and CMOS data 06699 TP REG Ghost interrupt 06701 TP REG Message to IP not send 06710 TP REG IP receive timeout 06711 TP REG IP receive error 06712 TP REG IP send error 06713 TP REG IP invalid message length received 06714 TP REG IP checkword timeout 06715 TP REG IP checkword error 06716 TP REG IP data not complete 06717 TP REG IP unknown error code 06718 TP REG IP control mode not available 06721 TP RC: RC ROM error 06722 TP RC: RC RAM error 06725 TP RC: RC status fault A/D-converter 06726 TP RC: RC error test signal T1 (AN.-OUT 1) 06727 TP RC: RC error test signal T2 (AN.-OUT 2) 06728 TP RC: RC error test signal T3 (+10V) 06729 TP RC: RC error test signal T4 (-10V) 06730 TP RC: RC set rudder overflow 06731 TP RC: RC ser-RX: parity error 06732 TP RC: RC ser-RX: checksum error 06733 TP RC: RC ser-RX: invalid message type 06738 TP REG serial integr.-control system timeout 06739 TP REG azimuth thruster interface error 06740 TP REG Actual rudder not equal Set-rudder 06741 TP REG Rudder1 not equal Rudder2 06742 TP REG Port rudder failure from extern 06743 TP REG Starboard rudder failure from extern 06744 TP REG Rudder Rate feedback failure

06745 TP REG Single rudder feedback not equal backup feed-back

06746 TP REG Invalid data for backup feedback 06747 TP REG Invalid data for single rudder feedback 06748 TP REG Invalid data for PRT rudder feedback 06749 TP REG Invalid data for STB rudder feedback


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

227

06750 TP REG ROT prediction error 06800 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword timeout 06801 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword error 06802 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid CAN object number 06803 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid message type 06804 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in progress)


10 System Faults


06805 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in queue) 06810 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 unknown error 06811 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid parameter 06812 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid write max value 06813 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: checksum error 06814 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: invalid block count 06815 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 receive buffer insufficient 06816 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: reset hang 06817 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid interrupt 06818 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: lost block 06819 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 short pool empty 06820 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 long pool empty 06821 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: bus off 06830 TP IP unknown error from IP 06831 TP IP RAM error 06832 TP IP ROM error 06833 TP IP Can bus LEC error 06834 TP IP Can bus buffer error 06835 TP IP Can bus STN protocol error 06836 TP IP Can bus off or warning level 06837 TP IP reserve 06838 TP IP System error watchdog, ... 06839 TP IP Error power supply +15V 06840 TP IP Error power supply -15V 06841 TP IP Error power supply 24V 06842 TP IP Error hold voltage 06843 TP IP TP time out 06844 TP IP Low current poti 1 reference 06845 TP IP Low current poti 2 reference 06846 TP IP Low current poti 3 reference 06847 TP IP Low current poti 4 reference 06848 TP IP Rudder rate feedback failure (STB or Single) 06849 TP IP Rudder rate feedback failure (PRT or Backup) 06850 TP IP Rudder3 rate feedback failure 06851 TP IP Rudder4 rate feedback failure 06852 TP IP Rudder5 rate feedback failure 06853 TP IP Rudder6 rate feedback failure 06854 TP IP Rudder7 rate feedback failure 06855 TP IP Rudder8 rate feedback failure 06856 TP IP Config of rudder input wrong 06857 TP IP Config of rudder output wrong 06858 TP IP Rudder relays failure (STB or Single = K1/K2) 06859 TP IP Rudder relays failure (PRT or Backup = K3/K4) 06860 TP IP reserve 06861 TP IP Relays 1 set error 06862 TP IP Relays 2 set error 06863 TP IP Relays 3 set error 06864 TP IP Relays 4 set error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

228

06865 TP IP Relays 5 set error 06866 TP IP Relays 6 set error 06867 TP IP Relays 7 set error 06868 TP IP Relays 8 set error 06869 TP IP Relays 9 set error 06870 TP IP Relays 10 set error


10 System Faults


06871 TP IP Relays 11 set error 06872 TP IP Relays 12 set error 06873 TP IP SIO pool empty 06874 TP IP SIO FIFO overrun 06875 TP IP Uart 0 error while reading byte 06876 TP IP Uart 0 error while writing byte 06877 TP IP Uart 0 illegal size for message type 06878 TP IP Uart 0 data time out while reading 06879 TP IP Uart 0 checksum error 06880 TP IP Uart 1 error while reading byte 06881 TP IP Uart 1 error while writing byte 06882 TP IP Uart 1 illegal size for message type 06883 TP IP Uart 1 data time out while reading 06884 TP IP Uart 1 checksum error 06885 TP IP Uart 2 error while reading byte 06886 TP IP Uart 2 error while writing byte 06887 TP IP Uart 2 illegal size for message type 06888 TP IP Uart 2 data time out while reading 06889 TP IP Uart 2 checksum error 06890 TP IP Uart 3 error while reading byte 06891 TP IP Uart 3 error while writing byte 06892 TP IP Uart 3 illegal size for message type 06893 TP IP Uart 3 data time out while reading 06894 TP IP Uart 3 checksum error 06895 TP IP Uart 4 error while reading byte 06896 TP IP Uart 4 error while writing byte 06897 TP IP Uart 4 illegal size for message type 06898 TP IP Uart 4 data time out while reading 06899 TP IP Uart 4 checksum error 06900 TP IP Uart 5 error while reading byte 06901 TP IP Uart 5 error while writing byte 06902 TP IP Uart 5 illegal size for message type 06903 TP IP Uart 5 data time out while reading 06904 TP IP Uart 5 checksum error 06905 TP IP Fan rotation failure 06906 TP IP Poti 1 reference short circuit 06907 TP IP Poti 2 reference short circuit 06908 TP IP Poti 3 reference short circuit 06909 TP IP Poti 4 reference short circuit 06910 TP REG Course integration error 06912 TP REG Joystick fault 06914 TP REG Missing position type 06915 TP REG Missing position status 06916 TP REG Trackmode-data wrong update 06917 TP REG Trackmode-data timeout 06918 TP REG Trackmode: OFF COURSE for NEW TRACK 06919 TP REG Trackmode: NEW TRACK in curve 06920 TP REG Trackmode centred


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

229

06922 TP REG Invalid curve sequence 06923 TP REG Filtered XTD too large 06929 TP REG Tp gyro fault 06931 TP REG RPM PRT missing 06932 TP REG RPM STB missing 06940 TP IP EEPROM error parameter data


10 System Faults


06941 TP IP EEPROM error version data 06942 TP IP EEPROM error Relais device 06943 TP IP EEPROM error Hold device 06944 TP IP EEPROM error Interconnection board 06945 TP IP EEPROM error A/D device 06946 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 1 06947 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 2 06948 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 3 06949 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 4 06950 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 5 06951 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 6 06952 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 7 06953 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 8

08001 SP DRIVER checkword timeout 08002 SP DRIVER checkword error 08005 SP DRIVER cancel timeout 08006 SP DRIVER BITE timeout 08007 SP DRIVER no BITE response 08010 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of system parameter 08011 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of user parameter 08101 SP MC1 CPOOL: error (1..3) 08102 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid pool 08103 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid buffer 08104 SP MC1 CPOOL: pool empty 08111 SP MC1 QUEUE: error (1..4) 08112 SP MC1 QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer 08113 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid queue 08114 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid buffer 08115 SP MC1 QUEUE: BAB pool empty 08124 SP MC1 RAM: error 08125 SP MC1 ROM: error 08126 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 TP-DMC1 timeout 08127 SP MC1 CMOS-RAM: error 08129 SP MC1 EEPROM organization bad 08130 SP MC1 EEPROM general failure 08131 SP MC1 EEPROM protect hang 08132 SP MC1 EEPROM lock hang 08133 SP MC1 EEPROM programming timeout 08134 SP MC1 EEPROM verify failed 08139 SP MC1 address overflow 08140 SP MC1 EEPROM parameter configuration invalid 08141 SP MC1 EEPROM user/system configuration invalid 08199 SP MC1 ghost interrupt from PIC 08201 SP MC1 serial message not send 08211 SP MC1 SIO receive error 08212 SP MC1 SIO send error 08213 SP MC1 SIO invalid message length


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

230

08214 SP MC1 SIO checkword timeout 08215 SP MC1 SIO checkword error 08220 SP MC1 speed timeout 08300 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout 08301 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error 08302 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number


10 System Faults


08303 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type 08304 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress) 08305 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) 08310 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error 08311 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter 08312 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value 08313 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error 08314 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count 08315 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient 08316 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang 08317 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt 08318 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block 08319 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty 08320 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty 08321 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off 08400 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout 08401 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error 08402 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number 08403 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type 08404 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress) 08405 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue) 08410 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown error 08411 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter 08412 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value 08413 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error 08414 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count 08415 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient 08416 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang 08417 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt 08418 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block 08419 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty 08420 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty 08421 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off 08480 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool empty 08481 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool back 08501 SP MC1 MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool 08502 SP MC1 MMCI pool is empty 08503 SP MC1 MMCI DPM error 08504 SP MC1 MMCI pool size too small during initialization 08505 SP MC1 MMCI function address is null 08506 SP MC1 MMCI received event without buffer queue

08507 SP MC1 MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive area

08508 SP MC1 MMCI DPM clear to send timeout 08509 SP MC1 MMCI invalid message length received 08510 SP MC1 MMCI illegal partition size 08511 SP MC1 MMCI lost data during receive 08520 SP MC1 MC2 checkword timeout


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

231

08521 SP MC1 MC2 checkword error 08522 SP MC1 MC2 invalid message type 08601 SP MC1 SI checkword timeout 08602 SP MC1 SI checkword error 08603 SP MC1 SI invalid broadcast message type 08604 SP MC1 SI invalid message type


10 System Faults


08700 SP MC1 EI1 analog input fault 08701 SP MC1 EI1 VDIG voltage fault 08702 SP MC1 EI1 VDD_M voltage fault 08703 SP MC1 EI1 VEE_M voltage fault 08704 SP MC1 EI1 VREF voltage fault 08705 SP MC1 EI1 VLM voltage fault 08706 SP MC1 EI1 VLP voltage fault 08710 SP MC1 EI1 high int. freq. at digtal input 08800 SP MC1 EI2 analog input fault 08801 SP MC1 EI2 UKOM voltage fault 08802 SP MC1 EI2 VDD_M voltage fault 08803 SP MC1 EI2 VEE_M voltage fault 08805 SP MC1 EI2 temperature input fault 08810 SP MC1 EI2 lever output fault 08811 SP MC1 EI2 busy relay fault 08812 SP MC1 EI2 lever feedback fault 08814 SP MC1 EI2 watchdog 08815 SP MC1 EI/SP no master 08816 SP MC1 SP lost one of two enable signals

09001 RKE1 RAM check error 09002 RKE1 ROM check error 09003 RKE1 CAN_KB bus frame error 09004 RKE1 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09005 RKE1 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09006 RKE1 EEPROM checksum error 09007 RKE1 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09008 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09009 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09010 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09011 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09012 RKE1 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09013 RKE1 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09014 RKE1 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09015 RKE1 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09016 RKE1 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09017 RKE1 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09018 RKE1 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09019 RKE1 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09020 RKE1 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09021 RKE1 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09025 RKE1 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09026 RKE1 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09027 RKE1 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09028 RKE1 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09029 RKE1 COM1 error while reading byte 09030 RKE1 COM1 error while writing byte 09031 RKE1 COM1 illegal size for message type


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

232

09032 RKE1 COM1 data time out while reading 09033 RKE1 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09101 RKE2 RAM check error 09102 RKE2 ROM check error 09103 RKE2 CAN_KB bus frame error


10 System Faults


09104 RKE2 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09105 RKE2 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09106 RKE2 EEPROM checksum error 09107 RKE2 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09108 RKE2 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09109 RKE2 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09110 RKE2 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09111 RKE2 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09112 RKE2 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09113 RKE2 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09114 RKE2 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09115 RKE2 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09116 RKE2 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09117 RKE2 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09118 RKE2 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09119 RKE2 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09120 RKE2 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09121 RKE2 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09125 RKE2 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09126 RKE2 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09127 RKE2 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09128 RKE2 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09129 RKE2 COM1 error while reading byte 09130 RKE2 COM1 error while writing byte 09131 RKE2 COM1 illegal size for message type 09132 RKE2 COM1 data time out while reading 09133 RKE2 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09201 RKE3 RAM check error 09202 RKE3 ROM check error 09203 RKE3 CAN_KB bus frame error 09204 RKE3 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09205 RKE3 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09206 RKE3 EEPROM checksum error 09207 RKE3 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09208 RKE3 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09209 RKE3 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09210 RKE3 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09211 RKE3 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09212 RKE3 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09213 RKE3 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09214 RKE3 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09215 RKE3 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09216 RKE3 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09217 RKE3 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09218 RKE3 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09219 RKE3 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09220 RKE3 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

233

09221 RKE3 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09225 RKE3 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09226 RKE3 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09227 RKE3 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09228 RKE3 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09229 RKE3 COM1 error while reading byte


10 System Faults


09230 RKE3 COM1 error while writing byte 09231 RKE3 COM1 illegal size for message type 09232 RKE3 COM1 data time out while reading 09233 RKE3 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09301 RKE4 RAM check error 09302 RKE4 ROM check error 09303 RKE4 CAN_KB bus frame error 09304 RKE4 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09305 RKE4 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09306 RKE4 EEPROM checksum error 09307 RKE4 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09308 RKE4 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09309 RKE4 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09310 RKE4 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09311 RKE4 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09312 RKE4 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09313 RKE4 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09314 RKE4 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09315 RKE4 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09316 RKE4 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09317 RKE4 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09318 RKE4 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09319 RKE4 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09320 RKE4 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09321 RKE4 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09325 RKE4 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09326 RKE4 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09327 RKE4 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09328 RKE4 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09329 RKE4 COM1 error while reading byte 09330 RKE4 COM1 error while writing byte 09331 RKE4 COM1 illegal size for message type 09332 RKE4 COM1 data time out while reading 09333 RKE4 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09401 RKE5 RAM check error 09402 RKE5 ROM check error 09403 RKE5 CAN_KB bus frame error 09404 RKE5 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09405 RKE5 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09406 RKE5 EEPROM checksum error 09407 RKE5 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09408 RKE5 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09409 RKE5 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09410 RKE5 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09411 RKE5 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09412 RKE5 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

234

09413 RKE5 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09414 RKE5 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09415 RKE5 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09416 RKE5 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09417 RKE5 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09418 RKE5 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error


10 System Faults


09419 RKE5 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09420 RKE5 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09421 RKE5 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09425 RKE5 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09426 RKE5 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09427 RKE5 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09428 RKE5 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09429 RKE5 COM1 error while reading byte 09430 RKE5 COM1 error while writing byte 09431 RKE5 COM1 illegal size for message type 09432 RKE5 COM1 data time out while reading 09433 RKE5 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09501 RKE6 RAM check error 09502 RKE6 ROM check error 09503 RKE6 CAN_KB bus frame error 09504 RKE6 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09505 RKE6 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09506 RKE6 EEPROM checksum error 09507 RKE6 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09508 RKE6 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09509 RKE6 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09510 RKE6 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09511 RKE6 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09512 RKE6 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09513 RKE6 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09514 RKE6 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09515 RKE6 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09516 RKE6 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09517 RKE6 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09518 RKE6 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09519 RKE6 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09520 RKE6 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09521 RKE6 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09525 RKE6 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09526 RKE6 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09527 RKE6 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09528 RKE6 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09529 RKE6 COM1 error while reading byte 09530 RKE6 COM1 error while writing byte 09531 RKE6 COM1 illegal size for message type 09532 RKE6 COM1 data time out while reading 09533 RKE6 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09601 RKE7 RAM check error 09602 RKE7 ROM check error 09603 RKE7 CAN_KB bus frame error 09604 RKE7 CAN_KB bus buffer error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

235

09605 RKE7 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09606 RKE7 EEPROM checksum error 09607 RKE7 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09608 RKE7 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09609 RKE7 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09610 RKE7 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error


10 System Faults


09611 RKE7 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09612 RKE7 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09613 RKE7 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09614 RKE7 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09615 RKE7 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09616 RKE7 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09617 RKE7 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09618 RKE7 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09619 RKE7 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09620 RKE7 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09621 RKE7 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09625 RKE7 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09626 RKE7 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09627 RKE7 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09628 RKE7 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09629 RKE7 COM1 error while reading byte 09630 RKE7 COM1 error while writing byte 09631 RKE7 COM1 illegal size for message type 09632 RKE7 COM1 data time out while reading 09633 RKE7 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09701 RKE8 RAM check error 09702 RKE8 ROM check error 09703 RKE8 CAN_KB bus frame error 09704 RKE8 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09705 RKE8 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09706 RKE8 EEPROM checksum error 09707 RKE8 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09708 RKE8 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09709 RKE8 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09710 RKE8 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09711 RKE8 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09712 RKE8 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09713 RKE8 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09714 RKE8 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09715 RKE8 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09716 RKE8 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09717 RKE8 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09718 RKE8 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09719 RKE8 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09720 RKE8 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09721 RKE8 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09725 RKE8 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09726 RKE8 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09727 RKE8 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09728 RKE8 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09729 RKE8 COM1 error while reading byte 09730 RKE8 COM1 error while writing byte


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

236

09731 RKE8 COM1 illegal size for message type 09732 RKE8 COM1 data time out while reading 09733 RKE8 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09801 RKE9 RAM check error 09802 RKE9 ROM check error


10 System Faults


09803 RKE9 CAN_KB bus frame error 09804 RKE9 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09805 RKE9 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09806 RKE9 EEPROM checksum error 09807 RKE9 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09808 RKE9 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09809 RKE9 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09810 RKE9 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09811 RKE9 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09812 RKE9 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09813 RKE9 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09814 RKE9 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09815 RKE9 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09816 RKE9 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09817 RKE9 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09818 RKE9 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09819 RKE9 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error 09820 RKE9 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09821 RKE9 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09825 RKE9 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09826 RKE9 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09827 RKE9 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09828 RKE9 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error 09829 RKE9 COM1 error while reading byte 09830 RKE9 COM1 error while writing byte 09831 RKE9 COM1 illegal size for message type 09832 RKE9 COM1 data time out while reading 09833 RKE9 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

09901 RKE10 RAM check error 09902 RKE10 ROM check error 09903 RKE10 CAN_KB bus frame error 09904 RKE10 CAN_KB bus buffer error 09905 RKE10 CAN_KB bus protocol error 09906 RKE10 EEPROM checksum error 09907 RKE10 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... ) 09908 RKE10 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error 09909 RKE10 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error 09910 RKE10 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error 09911 RKE10 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error 09912 RKE10 PS/2 Dev2 startbit error 09913 RKE10 PS/2 Dev2 paritybit error 09914 RKE10 PS/2 Dev2 stopbit error 09915 RKE10 PS/2 Dev2 timeout error 09916 RKE10 PS/2 Dev3 startbit error 09917 RKE10 PS/2 Dev3 paritybit error 09918 RKE10 PS/2 Dev3 stopbit error 09919 RKE10 PS/2 Dev3 timeout error


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

237

09920 RKE10 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE 09921 RKE10 CAN_KB no default Slave found 09925 RKE10 PS/2 Dev4 startbit error 09926 RKE10 PS/2 Dev4 paritybit error 09927 RKE10 PS/2 Dev4 stopbit error 09928 RKE10 PS/2 Dev4 timeout error


10 System Faults


09929 RKE10 COM1 error while reading byte 09930 RKE10 COM1 error while writing byte 09931 RKE10 COM1 illegal size for message type 09932 RKE10 COM1 data time out while reading 09933 RKE10 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

10001 VDR offline 10002 VDR no picture written, LAN connection lost 10010 VDR final recording medium data overflow 10011 VDR microphone test failed 10012 VDR error during process load 10013 VDR process aborted 10014 VDR error during picture grabbing 10016 VDR main power failure 10017 VDR UPS fault 10018 VDR audio not found 10019 VDR error during 4300 control process load 10020 VDR final recording medium bit error 10021 VDR final recording medium not connected 10022 VDR final recording medium IP control failure

10023 VDR receive timeout of NMEA 0183 data (IEC 61162-1/2) on serial interfaces or LAN

10024 VDR network error 10025 VDR external alarm


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

238


11 Index of Parameters


AAcceleration 116ADC Threshold Adjus 141Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display 137Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display 137Additional Alarms Setup Menu 118Additional Information (Transceiver) 126Administration 115Administration (Indicators) 120Advanced Settings (Service) 148AFT Bridge is active String 118AIS 115AIS Channel 131AIS Lost Target witout Alarm 118Alarm Relays Activation Delay (Indicators) 120Allowed to be Sensor Master (Indicators) 121Analog Gyro System (Sensor Interface) 128Antenna (Transceiver) 126Antenna Information (Service) 149Antenna Motor Frequency (Transceiver) 127ARCS Database 138ARCS User Permit Number 135ARPA 108ARPA Lost Target without Alarm 118Availability of additional Displays 136Azimuth Pulses per Revolution (Transceiver) 127Azimuth Thruster 1...4 137Azimuth Thruster Parameters 137Azimuth Thruster x 137

BBAS Device 1(...3) Identifier (Sensor Interface) 133Based on Specification (Indicators) 121Basic Radar 118Baud Rate (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123Baud Rate (Sensor Interface) 131Beam Width (Transceiver) 126BIOS Settings 153Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver) 126Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver) 126Bottom Track (BT) Input (Sensor Interface) 129Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) (Sensor Interface)

133Buzzer 105

CCatalog (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125Central Dimming Adjustment 122Channel (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 124, 125Channel (Sensor Interface) 131, 132Channel of this Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123,

Colored Angle Display Limit 137Commissioning Data 151Compress 113Config Transfer 151Configure 112Connected Monitor (Indicators) 120Connected Planning System 115Conning 135Conning (Indicators) 121

DDangerous Target Alarm (Indicators) 120Date & Time 102Default Depth (Startup Sensor Selection) 119Default Weather (Startup Sensor Selection) 119Default Wind (Startup Sensor Selection) 119Depth (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125Depth Sensor 1 (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125Depth Value 125Differentiated Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 119Diskette 104Displacement 136Displacement Table 136Display Pitch Bar 135Display Power Bar 135, 136Display Selected Gyro 123, 125, 131Distance Longitudinal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123,

124Distance Longitudinal (Sensor Interface) 129, 131, 132Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver) 126Distance to Bow (System) 115Distance to P (System) 116Distance to SB (System) 115Distance to Stern (System) 115Distance Transversal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123,

124Distance Transversal (Sensor Interface) 129, 132Distance Transversal (Transceiver) 126Double End Ferry 122Draught 136Driver (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123

EENC Database 138ENC User Permit No. 135ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDPILOT) 114Error Input (Sensor Interface) 128, 129Expand 113

FFrequency Deviation (Transceiver) 126

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

239

125CHARTRADAR Function (Indicators) 121CHARTRADAR Function License Key (Indicators) 121CHARTRADAR Identification Code (Indicators) 121Check IMB Alarm IO 142Clutch Label 135C-Map Identifier 135Collapse 113

Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of 117FWD Bridge is active String 118

GGenerator Parameters 136GLL, GGA Selection (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123



GLL, GGA Selection (Sensor Interface) 132Guard Zone Alarm (Indicators) 120Gyro (Sensor Interface) 128Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor 116Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor 116Gyro against Magnetic Compass 116Gyro Input Voltage (Sensor Interface) 128Gyro Monitoring 116

HHeading (Startup Sensor Selection) 118Heading Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128Headmarker (Service -> Transceiver) 145Height above Sea Level 126

IIgnore Gyro against COG above ROT of 117Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of 117IMB Map Storage Test 105Increment (Sensor Interface) 128, 129Indicator 114Indicator (Service) 140Installed Type of Tracking Facility 120Interswitch 150Interswitch (PCI) 114

KKeyboard 105Keyboard (Indicators) 120

LLast Modification Date (Transceiver) 127Length at Waterline 116Local Indicator Number 114Log Type (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124Log Type (Sensor Interface) 129, 132Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter-

faces) 124Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface)

130, 132Lost Target Alarm (Indicators) 120

MMagnetron (Service) 148Magnetron Hours (Service) 149Map Delete 103Map Transfer 102Maximum Radius 116Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 116Maximum Thruster Power 137Maximum Thruster RPM 137Minimum Radius 116Monitor Adjust 140

Name (Indicators) 120Nominal Speed 116Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver) 126Number of Clutches 135Number of Generators 136Number of Shafts 135

OOutput (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 132

PPlanning System 134PM Adjust (Service -> Transceiver) 147PMA Display (Service -> Transceiver) 146Position (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123Position (Sensor Interface) 131Position (Startup Sensor Selection) 118Position against Redundant Position Sensor 118Position Monitoring 118Position Quality Check 116Pulse Log (Sensor Interface) 128

RRadar 120Radar PPI Radius 121Reference (Sensor Interface) 128RKE Settings 144RKE Software Update 144Route (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125RSC Test Pictures 106RTE Message Route Identifier (Indicator’s Serial Inter-

faces) 125RTE Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125

SScale Generator Power Bar 136Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar 135Scale Off Course Bar 135Scale Off Track Bar 135Scale Orientation 137Scale RPM Bar 135Scale Rudder Display 135Scale Shaft Power Bar 136Sector Blanking (Transceiver) 126Security Unique Identifier (UID) 135Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets

134Selfcheck 105Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT 134Sensor Interface 127Sensor Interface Identifier (Sensor Interface) 129Sensor Interfaces 114Sensor Number (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123Sensor Number (Sensor Interface) 132

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05240

Monitor Aspect Ratio 122Monitor Control Interface 122

NNACOS 134, 150NACOS (System Layout) 114

Serial Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123Serial I/O Monitor 142Serial Output used as 125, 133Service 139Service Report 152Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P (Sensor Inter-

face) 133



Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz (Indicator’s Serial In-terfaces) 125

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) (Sensor Interface) 131

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) (Indicator’s Seri-al Interfaces) 123

Setting-to-Work (Service -> Transceiver) 145Shaft Parameters 135Ship Data 115Ship Data for AIS 115Software Update 143Speed (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124Speed (Sensor Interface) 132Speed (Startup Sensor Selection) 118Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor 117Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor 118Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor 118Speed Capability (Transceiver) 126Speed Monitoring 117Speed Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128Squat Coefficient 136Startup Sensor Selection 118STC Compensation (Service) 149STC Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145System / Ship Parameters 115System Fault Alarm (Indicators) 120System Maintenance Manager 100System Position (System) 115

TTB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn 118Thruster Angle Display Color 137Thruster Angle Display Mode 137Time (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124Time (Sensor Interface) 132Time (Startup Sensor Selection) 118Time from Selected Position Sensor (Startup Sensor Sel-

ection) 119Tools 102Track Transfer 104TRACKPILOT 114TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces)

125Transceiver 114Transceiver (Service) 145Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT 122Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter-

faces) 124Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 130,

132Trigger Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145Tuning Indication Gain 149Tuning Offset (Service) 149Type of AIS 131Type of Generation (Transceiver) 126

VVDR 115Video Anti Clutter Sea 118Video MBS (Service -> Transceiver) 146VX Input (Sensor Interface) 130VY Input (Sensor Interface) 130

WWater Track Input (WT) (Sensor Interface) 130Weather (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125Wind (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125Wind Reference (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 133WPL Remark (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125

XXPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130

YYPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

241

UUse Speed from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-

faces) 123Use Speed from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132Use Time from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-

faces) 124Use Time from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05242


12 Cabling Documents


Title Page

C a b l e D i a g r a m , G e n e r a l R e m a r k s , 1 / 6 245

C a b l e D i a g r a m , I n d e x , 2 / 6 246

C a b l e D i a g r a m , S i n g l e R a d a r , 3 / 6 247

C a b l e D i a g r a m , D u a l R a d a r , 4 / 6 248

C a b l e D i a g r a m , M u l t i p l e R a d a r , 5 / 6 249

C a b l e D i a g r a m , C o n s o l e I n t e r n a l , 6 / 6 250

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , R e m a r k s , 1 / 8 251

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , I n d e x , 2 / 8 252

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , D i s p l a y C o n n e c t i o n , 3 / 8 253

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , S t a n d a r d I n t e r f a c e s , 4 / 8 254

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , o p t i o n a l C O M E x p a n d e r , 5 / 8 2 5 5

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , o p t i o n a l A n a l o g I n t e r f a c e , 6 / 8 2 5 6

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r u p ( V e r s i o n A ) , 7 / 8 2 5 7

C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r d o w n ( V e r s i o n B ) , 8 / 8 2 5 8

X - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 259

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 4 260

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 1 a / 4 261

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 4 262

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 2 a / 4 263

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d H e a t i n g c a b l i n g , 3 / 4 264

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r , 4 / 4 265

X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B , c a b l i n g o f I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o a r d , b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 266

S - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r , V e r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 267

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 7 268

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 7 269

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d S t a r t U n i t 2 c a b l i n g , 3 / 7 270

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 4 / 7 271

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 5 / 7 272

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r , H e a t i n g a n d S t a r t U n i t 1 c a b l i n g , 6 / 7 273

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r c a b l i n g , 7 / 7 274

S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r V e r s i o n B , C o n n e c t i o n B o a r d i n b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 275

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

243



Grounding

All components of the radar system have contacts such as bolts or terminals for grounding. Grounding isimportant for EMC purposes as well as for protecting people’s lives.

Both purposes are covered by the standard grounding of the system’s housings to the ship’s metallicstructure (bolted or welded). Regardless of the type of ship’s grounding (e.g. star pattern or ground planepattern), no potential difference should be measurable between two different ground connectors. Potentialdifferences cause compensation currents on the cable shields. If the ship has no metallic structure, allconductively connected metallic parts form an artificial ground.

All ground connections should be as short as possible. If possible, different units should be connected toindividual ground connectors. Whenever possible, metallic housings should be screwed or welded directlyto the ship’s metallic structure. If a safe grounding contact cannot be ensured, additional conductors arenecessary. Furthermore, all ground connections should have a low RF-impedance, and should beresistant against vibration and corrosion. Grounding conductors on an open-air deck must be made ofcorrosion-protected steel, and inside the ship they must be made of copper.

The grounding should be done in such a way that the connection can be inspected in a convenientmanner.

EMC Purposes

The shields of all cables must be connected at both ends if no other instructions are given.

CAUTIONThe screen of the coax cables must be connected to thecable glands or cable entries of the housings AND to theappropriate terminals. If the screen is connected to theterminals only, the signals might be disturbed.See Figure 3-2 on page 29.

Protective Ground

All removable metallic parts of the housings are grounded by means of separate, flexible cables to themain structure of the housing. It is important to connect this ground-cable after parts have beendismounted or exchanged.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

244



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

245Fig. 12-1 Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05246

Fig. 12-2 Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

247Fig. 12-3 Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05248

Fig. 12-4 Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

249Fig. 12-5 Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05250

Fig. 12-6 Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

251Fig. 12-7 Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05252

Fig. 12-8 Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

253Fig. 12-9 Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05254

Fig. 12-10 Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

255Fig. 12-11 Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05256

Fig. 12-12 Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

257Fig. 12-13 Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05258

Fig. 12-14 Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

259

Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1

ztr1

_407

.pdf



230

V.a

sepa

rate

stbe

conn

ecte

dr

elec

tron

ics.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05260

Fig. 12-16 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4

Onl

yfo

r1-

ph11

5V

and

Ifa

3-ph

mot

oris

used

,m

ains

supp

lyca

ble

mu

tosu

pply

the

tran

scei

ve

ztr1

_404

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

261

Fig. 12-17 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4

ztr1

_404

a.pd

f



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05262

Fig. 12-18 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4

ztr1

_405

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

263Fig. 12-19 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4

ztr1

_405

a.pd

f



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05264

Fig. 12-20 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4

ztr1

_406

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

265Fig. 12-21 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4

ztr1

_400

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05266

Fig. 12-22 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1

ztr1

_408

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

267Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1

ztr1

_415

.pdf



V. para

teco

nnec

ted

ctro

nics

.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05268

Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7

Onl

yfo

r1-

ph11

5V

and

230

Ifa

3-ph

mot

oris

used

,ase

mai

nssu

pply

cabl

em

ustb

eto

supp

lyth

etr

ansc

eive

rel

e

ztr1

_409

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

269Fig. 12-25 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7

ztr1

_410

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05270

Fig. 12-26 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7

ztr1

_411

.pdf



ersi

onA

te nect

edni

cs.

iver

):se

dif

aar

ate

cabl

etU

nit1

mus

tto

ris

used

.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

271Fig. 12-27 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7

Onl

yfo

r1-

ph11

5V

and

230

VV

(tra

nsm

itter

up).

Ifa

3-ph

mot

oris

used

,ase

para

mai

nssu

pply

cabl

em

ustb

eco

nto

supp

lyth

etr

ansc

eive

rel

ectr

oF

orV

ersi

onB

(bul

khea

dtr

ansc

eju

mpe

rs(s

hort

ing

bars

)ca

nbe

u3-

ph23

0V

mot

oris

used

.Ase

pfo

rm

ains

supp

lyth

eof

the

Sta

rbe

conn

ecte

dif

a3-

ph40

0V

mo

ztr1

_412

.pdf



ifa ca

ble

1m

ust

used

.

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05272

Fig. 12-28 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7

For

Ver

sion

B(b

ulkh

ead

tran

scei

ver)

:ju

mpe

rs(s

hort

ing

bars

)ca

nbe

used

3-ph

230

Vm

otor

isus

ed.A

sepa

rate

for

mai

nssu

pply

the

ofth

eS

tart

Uni

tbe

conn

ecte

dif

a3-

ph40

0V

mot

oris

ztr1

_413

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

273Fig. 12-29 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7

ztr1

_414

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05274

Fig. 12-30 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7

ztr1

_401

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

275Fig. 12-31 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1

ztr1

_416

.pdf



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05276


13 Outline Drawings

13 Outline Drawings

Title Page

P r o c e s s o r C o n t r o l l e d I n t e r s w i t c h ( P C I ) , B u l k h e a d , G E 3 0 2 3 O 0 0 0 B Z 278

D i s p l a y E l e c t r o n i c s U n i t w i t h m o u n t e d I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o x , G E 3 0 6 2 G 0 5 0 M B 1 / 3 279

D i s p l a y E l e c t r o n i c s U n i t S t a n d - A l o n e , G E 3 0 6 2 G 0 5 0 M B 2 / 3 280

I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o x S t a n d - A l o n e , G E 3 0 6 2 G 0 5 0 M B 3 / 3 281

2 3 " C o n s o l e M o n i t o r , y a r d m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 5 5 M B 282

2 3 " D e s k t o p M o n i t o r w i t h o u t o p e r a t i n g p a n e l , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 5 6 M B 283

2 3 " D e s k t o p M o n i t o r w i t h o p e r a t i n g p a n e l , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 5 7 M B 284

C 5 C o n s o l e S t a n d - a l o n e w i t h 2 3 " M o n i t o r , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 5 8 M B 285

1 9 " C o n s o l e M o n i t o r , y a r d m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 5 5 M B 286

1 9 " D e s k t o p M o n i t o r w i t h o u t o p e r a t i n g p a n e l , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 5 6 M B 287

1 9 " D e s k t o p M o n i t o r w i t h o p e r a t i n g p a n e l , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 5 7 M B 288

C 5 C o n s o l e S t a n d - a l o n e w i t h 1 9 " M o n i t o r , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 5 8 M B 289

S C C C 4 C o n s o l e 5 5 0 m m , K S 3 0 0 4 O 0 0 0 G Z 1 / 3 290






S C C C 4 C o n s o l e 5 5 0 m m s t a n d - a l o n e , K S 3 0 0 5 O 0 0 0 G Z 1 / 3 296






O p e r a t i n g U n i t ( f o r s h i p y a r d i n s t a l l a t i o n ) , B D 3 0 2 7 O 0 0 0 M B 302

Tr a c k b a l l O p e r a t i n g U n i t ( f o r s h i p y a r d ’ s i n s t a l l a t i o n ) , B D 3 0 2 8 O 0 0 0 M B 303

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

277


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05278

Fig. 13-1 Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ

ztr1

_321

.pdf


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

279

Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3

GE3

062G

050M

B-00

1--


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05280

Fig. 13-3 Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3

GE3

062G

050M

B-00

2--


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

281

Fig. 13-4 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3

GE3

062G

050M

B-00

3--


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05282

Fig. 13-5 23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

283

Fig. 13-6 23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05284

Fig. 13-7 23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

285

Fig. 13-8 C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05286

Fig. 13-9 19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

287

Fig. 13-10 19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05288

Fig. 13-11 19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

289

Fig. 13-12 C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB


13 Outline Drawings

ENTIL

ATIO

N

0

490

640

1090

0606,

76

1150

670

750

30°

Typ

e of

enc

losu

re :

IP22

550

AIR

VEN

TILA

TION

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:15

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt1

MSV

42

3000

0556

2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05290

Fig. 13-13 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3

AIR

V

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

HA

ND

RAIL

CRT

Mon

itor

or T

FT M

onito

r

W A

W B

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt2

MSV

42

3000

0556

2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

291Fig. 13-14 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 2/3

0

566,

50 60063

VIE

VIE

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

16

100

450

530550

AA

AV

AIL

ABL

E SP

AC

EFO

R C

ABL

E IN

PUT

* EQ

UALI

TY A

CC

ORD

ING

TO

DIN

ISO

110

1TH

E V

ARI

ATIO

N O

F TH

E EQ

UALI

TYO

F TH

E TO

P PL

AIN

MUS

T BE

LES

STH

AN

1m

m.

( TH

E A

CTU

AL

SURF

AC

E H

AS

TOFI

T IN

BET

WEE

N T

WO

PLA

INS

WIC

H A

RE L

OC

ATE

D IN

A

DIS

TAN

CE

OF

1mm

)

FRO

NT

HEI

GH

T O

F FO

UND

ATIO

N A

BOV

E FL

OO

R: 5

0-20

0mm

DEP

END

ENT

ON

CLA

SS R

EGUL

ATIO

N

FOUN

DA

TION

VIE

W

50-2

00m

m

*

FLO

OR

LEV

EL

DEC

K

1.0

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt3

MSV

42

3000

0556

2

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05292


020

0 20 100

390

470

490

190

A-A

(1 :

2)

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

ATIO

N0

490

640

1090

0596,

76

1150

660

740

30°

AIR

VEN

TILA

TION

Typ

e of

enc

losu

re :

IP22

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:15

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_A

Z305

4

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt1

MSV

42

3000

0556

3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05


AIR

VEN

TIL

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

HA

ND

RAIL

CRT

Mon

itor

or T

FT M

onito

r

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_A

Z305

4

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt2

MSV

42

3000

0556

3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05294


0 63 578

611

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

16

100

600

680700

AA

* EQ

UALI

TY A

CC

ORD

ING

TO

DIN

ISO

110

1TH

E V

ARI

ATIO

N O

F TH

E EQ

UALI

TYO

F TH

E TO

P PL

AIN

MUS

T BE

LES

STH

AN

1m

m.

( TH

E A

CTU

AL

SURF

AC

E H

AS

TOFI

T IN

BET

WEE

N T

WO

PLA

INS

WIC

H A

RE L

OC

ATE

D IN

A

DIS

TAN

CE

OF

1mm

)

HEI

GH

T O

F FO

UND

ATIO

N A

BOV

E FL

OO

R: 5

0-20

0mm

DEP

END

ENT

ON

CLA

SS R

EGUL

ATIO

N

FRO

NT

AV

AIL

ABL

E SP

AC

EFO

R C

ABL

E IN

PUT

FOUN

DA

TION

VIE

W

50-2

00m

m

*

FLO

OR

LEV

EL

DEC

K

1.0

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

004

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_A

Z305

4

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt3

MSV

42

3000

0556

3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05


020

0 20 100

390

470

490

190

A-A

(1 :

2)

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

04O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

ENTIL

ATIO

N

0

490

640

1090

0606,

76

1150

670

750

30°

Typ

e of

enc

losu

re :

IP22

550

AIR

VEN

TILA

TION

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:15

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt1

MSV

42

3000

0556

4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05296

Fig. 13-19 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3

AIR

V

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

HA

ND

RAIL

CRT

Mon

itor

or T

FT M

onito

r

W A

W B

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt2

MSV

42

3000

0556

4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

297Fig. 13-20 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 2/3

0

566,

50 60063

VIE

VIE

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

16

100

450

530550

AA

AV

AIL

ABL

E SP

AC

EFO

R C

ABL

E IN

PUT

* EQ

UALI

TY A

CC

ORD

ING

TO

DIN

ISO

110

1TH

E V

ARI

ATIO

N O

F TH

E EQ

UALI

TYO

F TH

E TO

P PL

AIN

MUS

T BE

LES

STH

AN

1m

m.

( TH

E A

CTU

AL

SURF

AC

E H

AS

TOFI

T IN

BET

WEE

N T

WO

PLA

INS

WIC

H A

RE L

OC

ATE

D IN

A

DIS

TAN

CE

OF

1mm

)

FRO

NT

HEI

GH

T O

F FO

UND

ATIO

N A

BOV

E FL

OO

R: 5

0-20

0mm

DEP

END

ENT

ON

CLA

SS R

EGUL

ATIO

N

FOUN

DA

TION

VIE

W

50-2

00m

m

*

FLO

OR

LEV

EL

DEC

K

1.0

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

550,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 0

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\550

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt3

MSV

42

3000

0556

4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05298


020

0 20 100

390

470

490

190

A-A

(1 :

2)

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

000G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

ATIO

N0

490

640

1090

0596,

76

1150

660

740

30°

700

AIR

VEN

TILA

TION

Typ

e of

enc

losu

re :

IP22

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:15

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt1

MSV

42

3000

0556

5

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05


AIR

VEN

TIL

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

HA

ND

RAIL

CRT

Mon

itor

or T

FT M

onito

r

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt2

MSV

42

3000

0556

5

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05300


0 63 578

611

VIE

W A

VIE

W B

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

16

100

600

680700

AA

* EQ

UALI

TY A

CC

ORD

ING

TO

DIN

ISO

110

1TH

E V

ARI

ATIO

N O

F TH

E EQ

UALI

TYO

F TH

E TO

P PL

AIN

MUS

T BE

LES

STH

AN

1m

m.

( TH

E A

CTU

AL

SURF

AC

E H

AS

TOFI

T IN

BET

WEE

N T

WO

PLA

INS

WIC

H A

RE L

OC

ATE

D IN

A

DIS

TAN

CE

OF

1mm

)

HEI

GH

T O

F FO

UND

ATIO

N A

BOV

E FL

OO

R: 5

0-20

0mm

DEP

END

ENT

ON

CLA

SS R

EGUL

ATIO

N

FRO

NT

AV

AIL

ABL

E SP

AC

EFO

R C

ABL

E IN

PUT

FOUN

DA

TION

VIE

W

50-2

00m

m

*

FLO

OR

LEV

EL

DEC

K

1.0

23

4

32

5

C D

46

78

A B

STN

ATL

AS

Mar

ine

Elec

troni

csM

emb

er o

f the

Eur

oMa

rine

Gro

up

Ursp

r.Er

s.d

.Er

s.f.

Zust

.Ä

nder

ung

Da

tum

Na

me

Bea

rb.

Gep

r.N

orm

Da

tum

Na

me

3 Bl

.

Ma

ßsta

b:

Wer

ksto

ff

Ob

erflä

che

Frei

ma

ßtol

era

nzen

SCC

C4

STA

ND

ARD

Sect

ion

700,

Mon

itor C

ons.

KS 3

005

O 1

00 G

Z

0.5

1:5

Het

12.S

ep.

2002

Hoh

orst

12.S

ep.

\700

_M_S

tand

_Alo

ne

Sta

nd A

lone

for C

RT a

nd T

FT

Bla

tt3

MSV

42

3000

0556

5

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05


020

0 20 100

390

470

490

190

A-A

(1 :

2)

D E FC

1

BA

1

P:\M

SV42

-NA

V-C

OM

\Pro

jekt

e\Sc

c200

2\D

NV

KS30

05O

100G

Z.pd

f


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05302

Fig. 13-25 Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB

ztr1

_327

.pdf


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

303Fig. 13-26 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB

ztr1

_328

.pdf


13 Outline Drawings

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05

304


Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record



180°

90°

135°

45°

15°

60°

75°

105°

120°

150°165°195°

210°

240°

255°

285°

300°

330°345°

30°

315°

225°

0°

270°

180°

90°

135°

45°315°315°

225°225°

0°

270°

Blanking Sector(inner circle)

Blind Sector(outer circle)

Example:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05

305

Ship’s Name:

Transmitter No.:

Remarks:

Installation Company: Signed:

Location, Date of Adjustment:

Antenna Location:

Type:




180°

90°

135°

45°

15°

60°

75°

105°

120°

150°165°195°

210°

240°

255°

285°

300°

330°345°

30°

315°

225°

0°

270°

180°

90°

135°

45°315°

225°

0°

270°

Blanking Sector(inner circle)

Blind Sector(outer circle)

Example:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05306

Ship’s Name:

Transmitter No.:

Remarks:

Installation Company: Signed:

Location, Date of Adjustment:

Antenna Location:

Type:


Notes

Notes

Space for your notes:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05

307


Notes

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05

308

Date post:	07-Dec-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	citaccitac
View:	1,085 times
Download:	384 times